Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR 745H S User Manual

DDVDVRecRord-er745H-S  
DVR-645H-S  
TM  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Environment  
CAUTION  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in  
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or  
strong artificial light)  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
10 cm at each side).  
(for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
WARNING  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
For Taiwan exclusively  
Taiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
05 Recording  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 34  
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Setting the picture quality/recording  
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Disc / content format playback  
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12  
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13  
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Simultaneous recording and playback  
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Recording from an external component . 46  
Automatic recording from a satellite  
tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 50  
02 Connecting up  
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Using other types of video output . . . . . . 17  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite  
receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite  
receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting to an AV amplifier or  
06 Playback  
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 22  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the  
contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 58  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 61  
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . 61  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Displaying disc information on-screen . . 63  
03 Controls and displays  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
04 Getting started  
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 28  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07 Playing and recording from a DV  
camcorder  
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 64  
Recording from a DV camcorder. . . . . . . 64  
DV video setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
About DV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
12 The Disc Setup menu  
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
13 The Video Adjust menu  
08 Editing  
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
09 Copying and backup  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
14 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 106  
Selecting other languages for language  
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
10 Using the Jukebox  
15 Additional information  
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Copying files from a USB device to the  
HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 89  
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
On-screen displays and recorder  
displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Setting up the remote to control your  
11 The PhotoViewer  
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 131  
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Importing files to the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Importing files from a USB device . . . . . . 94  
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . 95  
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01  
Before you start  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
What’s in the box  
Important  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in  
hazards such as leakage and bursting.  
Please observe the following:  
Please confirm that the following  
accessories are in the box when you open it.  
• Remote control  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries  
together.  
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries  
together—although they may look  
similar, different batteries may have  
different voltages.  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2  
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)  
• RF antenna cable  
• Power cable  
• These operating instructions  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends  
of each battery match the indications in  
the battery compartment.  
• Remove batteries from equipment that  
isn’t going to be used for a month or  
more.  
• When disposing of used batteries,  
please comply with governmental  
regulations or environmental public  
instruction’s rules that apply in your  
country/area.  
Putting the batteries in the  
remote control  
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the  
battery compartment following the  
indications (,) inside the  
compartment.  
WARNING  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
D3-4-2-3-3_En  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Using the remote control  
Disc / content format  
playback compatibility  
Please keep in mind the following when  
using the remote control:  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles  
between the remote and the remote  
sensor on the unit.  
Compatible media  
• DVD-RW ver.1.1 / 1x, 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x  
to 4x / 2 x to 6x  
• Remote operation may become  
unreliable if strong sunlight or  
fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
• Remote controllers for different devices  
can interfere with each other. Avoid  
using remotes for other equipment  
located close to this unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a  
fall off in the operating range of the  
remote.  
• When the batteries run down or you  
change the batteries, the remote control  
mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote  
Control Mode on page 116.  
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x  
to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x  
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x  
• DVD+R 2.4x / 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x  
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to  
3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x  
Note that older models of DVD recorders  
and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2  
discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If  
you want to share DVD-RW discs between  
this recorder and an older recorder/writer,  
we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.  
• Use within the operating range in front of  
the remote control sensor on the front  
panel, as shown.  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD  
recorders’ limited compatibility with DVD-  
RW ver. 1.2 discs.  
Model  
Playable  
Yes1,2,3  
Yes1  
Recordable  
DVR-7000  
No  
7 m  
DVR-310 /  
DVR-510H  
No  
• You can control this recorder using the  
remote sensor of another Pioneer  
component using the CONTROL IN jack  
on the rear panel. See Rear panel  
connections on page 14 for more  
information.  
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before  
playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs  
may not play.  
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in  
the display when you load a disc. However, this will not  
affect playback.  
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01  
Before you start  
DVD/HDD Recording and playback compatibility  
This recorder can play and record all the currently popular DVD disc types, as well as  
providing HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences  
between the different disc types.  
DVD  
+RW  
DVD-  
RAM  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
Marks used in this  
manual  
HDD  
DVD (VR)  
*1  
DVD (Video)  
DVD (VR)  
*1  
DVD (Video)  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
*2  
*13, 16  
Logos  
Re-recordable /  
Erasable  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*14  
Editing of recorded  
programs  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
Recording of Copy-  
once protected  
material  
*12  
*12  
*12  
Playback in other  
players/recorders  
n/a  
*5  
*6  
*7  
*6  
*6, 15  
*8  
*9  
Chase play  
16:9 and 4:3 program  
recording  
Dual Mono/Bilingual  
*11  
*11  
*11  
broadcast recording *10, 11  
of both audio ch.  
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only  
Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work  
reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may  
become unusable when recorded or edited.  
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available  
recording time, nor increase the number of recordable  
titles left.  
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback  
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized  
before it can be recorded (page 100). In this case,  
initialization will take about 1 hour.  
Notes to table  
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 100)  
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording  
(page 100)  
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase  
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist  
editing  
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback  
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in  
some units) (page 48)  
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback  
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback  
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback  
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off (page 113)  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM  
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs  
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL  
(Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable  
layers on a single side, giving about 1.8  
times the recording capacity of a  
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can  
record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL  
discs.  
About DualDisc playback  
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side  
of which contains DVD content –video,  
audio, etc. –while the other side contains  
non-DVD content such as digital audio  
material.  
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not  
compliant with the CD Audio specification  
and therefore may not play.  
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video  
mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on  
this unit on other DVD recorders/players,  
you must finalize them. (Note that some  
DVD recorders/players may not play  
even finalized DL discs.)  
• Please read the information provided on  
the disc packaging carefully before  
purchasing DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs:  
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a  
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being  
played will be scratched. Scratched discs  
may not be playable.  
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this  
product. DVD-Audio content will not play.  
For more detailed information on the  
DualDisc specification, please refer to the  
disc manufacturer or disc retailer.  
Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 /  
2x to 4x DVD-R discs.  
Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R  
should be compatible with 2x or 4x  
recording; DVD+R with 2.4x to 8x  
recording.  
• This logo indicates that the disc is a  
DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:  
Other disc compatibility  
In addition to DVD, this recorder is  
compatible with a wide range of disc types  
(media) and formats. Playable discs will  
generally feature one of the following logos  
on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note  
however that some disc types, such as  
recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an  
unplayable format—see below for further  
compatibility information.  
• Correct operation has been confirmed  
for DVD-R DL discs (ver. 3.0 / 2x, 4x)  
produced by the following  
Audio CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku  
Media, Verbatim (as of March 2005).  
Video CD  
Super Video CD (Super VCD)  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01  
Before you start  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files  
(if these limits are exceeded, only files  
and folders up to these limits are  
playable)  
CD-R/-RW compatibility  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW  
discs.  
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/  
Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM*  
containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX  
files.  
WMA (Windows Media Audio)  
compatibility  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD  
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.  
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both  
compatible with this recorder.  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-  
Audio and Video CD/Super VCD)  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio  
only  
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the  
box indicates that this recorder can playback  
Windows Media Audio content.  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R,  
CD-RW, USB  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio  
Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio  
(WMA)  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media  
Audio and refers to an audio compression  
technology developed by Microsoft  
Corporation. WMA content can be encoded  
by using Windows Media Player for  
Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or  
Windows Media Player 10 series.  
®
®
®
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or  
48 kHz  
®
• Bit-rates: Any (128 Kbps or higher  
recommended)  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback:  
Yes  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows  
Media Codec 8 (files encoded using  
Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable  
but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,  
Voice and VBR)  
1
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file  
playback: No  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must  
be used for the recorder to recognize  
MP3 and WMA files – do not use for  
other file types)  
Note  
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by  
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)  
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your  
PC and/or software.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
option of playing the disc (thereby using up  
one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If  
you load a disc that contains expired DivX  
VOD content (for example, content that has  
zero remaining plays), the message Rental  
Expired is displayed.  
DivX video compatibility  
DivX is a compressed digital video format  
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited  
number of plays, then you may load the disc  
into your recorder and play the content as  
often as you like, and no message will be  
displayed.  
®
created by the DivX video codec from DivX,  
Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files  
burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping  
the same terminology as DVD-Video,  
individual DivX video files are called "Titles."  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc  
prior to burning, keep in mind that by default  
they will be played in alphabetical order.  
Important  
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM  
(Digital Rights Management) system.  
This restricts playback of content to  
specific, registered devices.  
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD  
content not authorized for this recorder,  
the message Authorization Error is  
displayed and the content will not play.  
• Resetting the recorder (as described in  
Resetting the recorder on page 133) will  
not cause you to lose your registration  
code.  
®
• Official DivX Certified product.  
®
• Plays all versions of DivX video  
®
(including DivX 6) with standard  
®
playback of DivX media files.  
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these  
must be used for the recorder to  
recognize DivX video files). Note that all  
files with the .avi extension are recognized  
as MPEG4, but not all of these are  
necessarily DivX video files and therefore  
may not be playable on this recorder.  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999  
files.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under  
license.  
JPEG file compatibility  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and  
EXIF 2.2* still image files  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
®
DivX VOD content  
DivX  
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif  
(must be used for the recorder to  
recognize JPEG files – do not use for  
other file types)  
• File structure: The recorder can load up  
to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if  
there are more files/folders that this on  
the disc then more can be reloaded)  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this recorder, you first need to  
register the recorder with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you  
submit to your provider.  
Some DivX VOD content may only be  
playable a fixed number of times. When you  
load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD  
content, the remaining number of plays is  
shown on-screen and you then have the  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01  
Before you start  
PC-created disc compatibility  
About the internal hard disk  
drive  
Discs recorded using a personal computer  
may not be playable in this unit due to the  
setting of the application software used to  
create the disc. In these particular  
instances, check with the software publisher  
for more detailed information.  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile  
piece of equipment. Depending on the  
conditions under which it is used, or through  
careless use, it is possible that the recorded  
contents will be damaged or lost completely,  
or that normal playback and recording will  
not be possible. Please understand that in  
the event of repair or replacement of the  
HDD or related components, all your HDD  
recordings will be lost.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF  
format) are not compatible with this  
recorder.  
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW  
software disc boxes for additional  
compatibility information.  
Please use the recorder following the  
guidelines below to protect against possible  
HDD failure.  
Dolby Digital  
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to  
store recordings permanently. We  
recommend that you back up your important  
recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect  
against accidental loss.  
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances  
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect  
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of  
recorded material resulting from HDD failure.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable,  
level surface.  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
DTS  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively  
hot or humid places, or in places that  
may be subject to sudden changes in  
temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to  
form inside the recorder. This can be a  
cause of HDD failure.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• Do not move the recorder immediately  
after switching it off. If you need to move  
the recorder, please follow the steps  
below:  
1 After the message POWER OFF is  
shown in the display, wait at least two  
minutes.  
Symbols used in this manual  
The following icons are provided to help you  
quickly identify which instructions you need  
for which kind of disc.  
HDD  
HDD  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
3 Move the recorder.  
DVD  
Any type of DVD disc  
(recordable or playback  
only), finalized or not.  
• If there’s a power failure while the  
recorder is on there is a chance that  
some data on the HDD will be lost.  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used  
improperly or in an unsuitable  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced  
DVD, finalized Video mode  
DVD-R/-RW.  
environment, it is possible that the HDD  
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of  
problemsincludeplaybackunexpectedly  
freezing and noticeable block noise  
(mosaic) in the picture. However,  
sometimes there will be no warning  
signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no  
playback of recorded material will be  
possible. In this case it will be necessary  
to replace the HDD unit.  
DVD (Video)  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW  
(unfinalized)  
DVD (VR)  
DVD+R  
VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
CD  
DVD+RW  
Optimizing HDD performance  
As you record and edit material on the HDD,  
the data on the disk becomes fragmented,  
eventually affecting the recorder’s  
performance. Before this happens, the  
recorder will warn you that it is time to  
optimize the HDD (which you can do from  
the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on  
page 101).  
DVD-RAM  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
Super VCD  
WMA or MP3 files  
DivX files  
DivX  
A L L  
All of the above  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02  
Connecting up  
CChoaptnern2 ecting up  
Rear panel connections  
1
2
3
4
5
6
HDMI OUT  
IN  
Y
OUTPUT 1  
INPUT 1/
A
UTO START REC  
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
P
B
DIGITAL CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT 2  
INPUT 3  
7
8
1
AC IN  
5
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT  
Connect to a power outlet using the supplied  
power cable after making all other  
connections.  
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through  
to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to  
your TV.  
2
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
A high-quality video output for connecting to  
a TV or monitor with a component video  
input.  
6
HDMI OUT  
HDMI output for high quality digital audio  
and video.  
3
OUTPUT1 and 2  
7
DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL  
Two sets of audio/video outputs (stereo  
analog audio; composite and S-video video)  
that you can use to connect TVs or monitors.  
A digital audio output for connecting to an  
AV amp/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder  
or other equipment with coaxial digital input.  
4
INPUT1/AUTO START REC and INPUT3  
8
CONTROL IN  
Two sets of audio/video inputs (stereo  
analog audio; composite and S-video video)  
that you can use to connect to satellite  
receivers, TVs, VCR or other source  
component for recording.  
Use to control this recorder from the remote  
sensor of another Pioneer component with a  
CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the  
Pioneer mark. Connect the CONTROL  
OUT of the other component to the  
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-  
plug cord.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Front panel connections  
On the front panel a flip-down cover hides  
more connections.  
USB  
DV IN  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
(MONO)  
INPUT 2  
9
10  
11  
12  
9
USB port (Type B)  
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-  
compatible printer.  
10 USB port (Type A)  
USB port for connecting a digital camera,  
USB memory or other USB device.  
11 DV IN  
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for  
connecting a DV camcorder.  
12 INPUT2  
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio;  
composite and S-video video), especially  
suitable for camcorders, game consoles,  
portable audio, etc.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02  
Connecting up  
1
Connect your TV antenna/cable TV  
Easy connections  
outlet to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on  
this recorder.  
The setup described here is a basic  
configuration that allows you to record TV  
programs on both this recorder and your  
VCR. When watching recordings from this  
recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to  
input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR.  
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is  
supplied) to connect the ANTENNA OUT  
jack on this recorder to the antenna input  
on your VCR.  
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the  
chain, connect this recorder directly to  
your TV and skip the next step.  
Important  
3
Use an RF antenna cable to connect  
• This recorder is equipped with copy  
protection technology. Do not connect  
this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your  
VCR via this recorder) using AV cables,  
as the picture from this recorder will not  
appear properly on your TV.  
the antenna output on your VCR to the  
antenna input on your TV.  
4
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/  
video inputs on your TV.  
Use the supplied three-pin audio/video  
cable. It is color-coded to help you match  
them up (red/white for the right/left audio  
connections and yellow for video in/outs).  
Make sure you match up the left and right  
outputs with their corresponding inputs for  
correct stereo sound.  
• Before making or changing any rear  
panel connections, make sure that all  
components are switched off and  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
5
Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN  
A/V  
IN 1  
A/V  
IN 2  
2 above) using a set of audio and video  
cables.  
TV  
ANTENNA  
IN  
5
3
2
• See the following page if you want to use  
S-video or component video cables for  
the video connection.  
4
ANTENNA  
OUT  
A/V  
OUT  
VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
HDMI OUT  
Y
IN  
OUTPUT  
INPUT 1/  
A
U
T
O
START REC  
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
P
B
DIGITAL CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
P
R
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
2
IPT  
3
ANTENNA  
OUT  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
1
Connecting using an S-video  
Using other types of video  
output  
output  
S-video carries the picture as separate color  
and luminance (brightness) signals.  
This recorder has standard (composite), S-  
video and component video outputs. The  
main difference between them is the quality  
of the picture. S-video delivers a better  
picture than composite video, while  
component video gives better picture quality  
still. The variety of outputs also gives you the  
flexibility of connecting your particular  
equipment using the best connection type  
available.  
There are two S-video outputs for connection  
to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment.  
Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to  
connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to  
an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or  
other equipment).  
2 Connecting using the component  
video output  
Component video carries the picture as two  
separate color signals, plus a luminance  
(brightness) signal.  
COMPONENT  
INPUT  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT  
See also Component Video Out on page 108  
for how to set up the component video  
output for use with a progressive scan-  
compatible TV.  
1
2
TV  
Use a component video cable (not  
HDMI OUT  
Y
IN  
OUTPUT  
1
INPUT 1/  
A
U
T
O
START REC  
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
P
B
supplied) to connect the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video  
input on your TV, monitor (or other  
equipment).  
DIG
O
OUT  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
2
INPUT  
3
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02  
Connecting up  
Connecting to a cable box or  
satellite receiver (1)  
A/V  
IN 1  
If you are using a cable box or satellite  
TV  
ANTENNA  
IN  
receiver with only a few scrambled channels,  
1
1
2
follow the setup on this page . If many or all  
A/V  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
the channels are scrambled, we recommend  
using the setup on the following page.  
Cable box/  
Satellite receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN  
3
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record unscrambled channels by  
selecting them on this recorder.  
1
ANTENNA  
OUT  
HDMI OUT  
• Record scrambled channels by selecting  
them on the cable box/satellite receiver  
and using the Auto Start Recording  
feature (see Automatic recording from a  
satellite tuner on page 46).  
Y
IN  
OUTPUT  
INPUT 1/  
A
U
T
O
STRT REC  
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
PB  
DIGITAL CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT  
P
R
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
2
INPUT  
3
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
• Watch one channel while recording  
another.  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’  
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.  
Always connect each component  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to  
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV  
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).  
This enables you to watch the output from  
this recorder.  
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.  
3
Connect the audio/video output of  
your cable box/satellite receiver to the  
INPUT jacks on this recorder using a set  
of A/V cables.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV  
channels.  
Note  
1 The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video  
connections if they’re available.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
Connecting to a cable box or  
satellite receiver (2)  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
If many or all the channels you receive by  
cable or satellite are scrambled, we  
recommend using this setup.  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to  
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV  
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).  
This enables you to watch discs.  
1
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record any channel by selecting it on  
the cable box/satellite receiver.  
3
Connect the audio/video output of  
your cable box/satellite receiver to the  
INPUT jacks on this recorder using a set  
of A/V cables.  
• Record using the Auto Start Recording  
feature (see Automatic recording from a  
satellite tuner on page 46).  
This enables you to record scrambled TV  
channels.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’  
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.  
Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
2
1
TV  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
HDMI OUT  
Y
IN  
OUTPUT  
INPUT 1/  
A
U
T
O
START REC  
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
PB  
DIGITAL CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT  
P
R
ANTENNA  
S-VIDEO  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
UDIO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
2
3
3
1
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
Cable box/  
Satellite receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
Note  
1 • The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another.  
• The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video  
connections if they’re available.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02  
Connecting up  
Connecting to an AV  
amplifier or receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN  
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you  
need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/  
receiver using the digital coaxial output. In  
addition to the digital connection, we  
recommend also connecting using the  
stereo analog connection.  
TV  
VIDEO  
IN  
4
VIDEO  
OUT  
AV amp/  
receiver  
1
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
DIGITAL IN  
COAXIAL  
You’ll probably also want to connect a video  
output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the  
standard (composite) video output (as  
shown here), or the S-video or component  
video connections.  
2
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
3
HDMI OUT  
Y
IN  
OUTPU
1
INPUT 1/  
O
A
U
U
T
T
P
O
U
ST1ART REC  
T
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
P
B
DIGITAL CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT  
P
R
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
S-VIDEO  
See also Audio Out on page 109 for how to  
set up the digital audio output. (Noise may  
be output from your speakers if the recorder  
is not set up to work with your AV amp/  
receiver.)  
OUTPUT  
2
A
N  
TENNA  
OUT  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
Important  
channels.  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV  
‘through’ your VCR or other component  
using A/V cables. Always connect it  
directly to your TV.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to  
a set of audio/video inputs on your AV  
amp/receiver.  
3
Use an coaxial digital audio cable (not  
supplied) to connect the COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT jack on this recorder to an  
coaxial digital input on your AV amp/  
receiver.  
This enables you to listen to multichannel  
1
surround sound.  
4
Connect the AV amp/receiver’s video  
output to a video input on your TV.  
Note  
1 If your AV amp/receiver doesn’t have an coaxial digital input, but has a optical type, converter boxes that convert  
from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting using HDMI  
Important  
• An HDMI connection can only be made  
with DVI-equipped components  
1
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped  
2
monitor or display , you can connect it to  
this recorder using an HDMI cable (not  
supplied).  
compatible with both DVI and High-  
bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a  
DVI connector, you will need a DVI to  
HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP  
connection, however, does not support  
audio. Consult your local audio dealer for  
more information.  
The HDMI connector outputs  
uncompressed digital video, as well as  
almost every kind of digital audio.  
Use an HDMI cable to connect the  
HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to  
an HDMI connector on an HDMI-  
compatible monitor.  
• The HDMI connection is compatible with  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/  
20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM  
signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and  
MPEG audio bitstream.  
HDMI  
IN  
• If your connected component is only  
compatible with Linear PCM, the signal  
is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is  
not output).  
HDMI-compatible display  
HDMI OUT  
• If you have connected to a Pioneer  
plasma display, please select the HDMI  
setup on the display (refer to the  
Y
IN  
OUTPUT  
1
INPUT 1/  
O
A
U
U
T
T
P
O
U
ST1ART REC  
T
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
PB  
DIGITAL CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT  
P
R
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
2
INPUT  
3
supplied manual for more on this).  
• The arrow on the cable connector body  
should be face down for correct  
alignment with the connector on the  
recorder.  
When connected to an HDMI component or  
HDCP-compatible DVI component, the  
HDMI indicator lights.  
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There  
are however settings you can change if you  
need to. See HDMI Output (only available  
when an HDMI device is connected) on  
page 114 for more information. Note that the  
HDMI settings remain in effect until you  
change them, or connect a new HDMI  
component.  
Note  
1 This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) version 1.2a and  
HDCP version 1.1. Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in  
unreliable signal transfers.  
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280  
x 720p, 1920 x 1080i) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i). If your display is not compatible with  
these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02  
Connecting up  
1
Connect a set of audio and video  
About HDMI  
inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set  
of outputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record from this recorder  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)  
supports both video and audio on a single  
digital connection for use with DVD players  
and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other  
AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide  
the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital  
Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification.  
HDCP is used to protect digital content  
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant  
displays.  
to your VCR or camcorder.  
• You can use standard video or S-video  
cables for the video connection.  
2
Connect a set of audio and video  
outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a  
set of inputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record tapes from your  
VCR or camcorder.  
HDMI has the capability to support  
• You can use standard video or S-video  
cables for the video connection.  
standard, enhanced, or high-definition video  
plus standard to multi-channel surround-  
sound audio. HDMI features include  
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of  
up to 5 gigabits per second (Dual Link), one  
connector (instead of several cables and  
connectors), and communication between  
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
• The front panel connections make  
convenient connections for a camcorder  
input.  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is  
possible to connect a DV camcorder or video  
deck, or DVD-R/-RW recorder and digitally  
transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/-RW discs to  
DVD-R/-RW.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.  
Connecting other AV sources  
Important  
Connecting a VCR or analog  
camcorder  
• This jack is for connection to DV  
equipment only. It is not compatible with  
digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video  
decks.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
ONE  
STANDBY/ON  
S
T
O
P
REC  
T
O
U
C
H
CH  
+
COPY  
REC  
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
V
I
D
E
O
L
AUDIO  
(MONO)  
INPUT  
R
USB  
D
V
I
N
2
DVR-745H-S  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
HDMI  
ONE  
TOUCH  
COPY  
STANDBY/ON  
STOP  
REC  
REC  
CH  
+
(Rear panel)  
(Front panel)  
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
V
I
D
E
O
L
AUDIO  
(MONO)  
INPUT  
R
USB  
2
1
2
DVR-745H-S  
DV  
IN  
DV  
OUT  
Analog camcorder  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
VCR  
DV camcorder  
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to  
connect the DV jack of your DV  
camcorder/video deck to the front panel  
DV IN jack of this recorder.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
WMA/MP3 file storage devices  
• Memory card reader (any type of  
memory card)  
Connecting a USB device  
Using the USB ports on the front of the  
recorder you can connect USB devices such  
as digital cameras and printers . Please also  
see the instructions that came with the  
device you want to connect before using.  
• USB memory  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device  
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the  
device is partitioned, this recorder may not  
recognize it.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
ONE  
STANDBY/ON  
S
T
O
P
REC  
T
O
U
C
H
CH  
+
COPY  
REC  
Note that although multi-slot card readers  
can be used, the recorder will only recognize  
the first card inserted. To read another card,  
remove all the cards and insert the card to be  
read again.  
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
V
I
D
E
O
L
AUDIO  
(MONO)  
INPUT  
R
USB  
D
V
I
N
2
DVR-745H-S  
USB  
Type B  
USB  
Type A  
USB  
USB  
Digital Camera  
Using a USB printer  
• Use a PictBridge-comaptible printer.  
PictBridge-compatible  
Printer  
Plugging in  
Important  
• Some USB devices may not work with  
this recorder.  
After checking all the connections, plug in  
the recorder.  
• Devices may not work reliably if  
connected to this recorder via a USB  
hub.  
Use the supplied power cable to  
connect this recorder to a power outlet.  
JPEG file storage devices  
• Digital still camera  
• Memory card reader (any type of  
memory card)  
• USB memory  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device  
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the  
device is partitioned, this recorder may not  
recognize it.  
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be  
used to transfer up to about 4000 files.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03  
Controls and displays  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Remote control  
5
HDD  
1
2
4
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for  
recording or playback.  
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
OPEN/CLOSE  
3
5
HDD  
DVD  
INPUT  
SELECT  
6
7
6
DVD  
ABC  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Press to select the DVD for recording or  
GHI  
PQRS  
JKL  
playback.  
8
TUV  
CH  
9
7
INPUT SELECT (page 46)  
CLEAR  
G-CODE  
+
CLEAR  
10  
11  
Press to change the input to use for  
recording.  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
MENU  
12  
14  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
13  
8
Alphanumeric buttons, + and CLEAR  
ENTER  
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/  
title selection; channel selection, and so on.  
The same buttons can also be used to enter  
names for titles, discs and so on.  
15  
16  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
17  
19  
18  
HELP  
DISPLAY  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
Use the + button to enter non-alphanumeric  
characters and symbols.  
PAUSE STOP OK  
BACK CM SKIP  
20  
CASE  
SELECTION  
NEXT  
PREV  
REC  
STEP/SLOW  
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.  
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC  
21  
22  
TV CONTROL  
9
CH +/– (page 34)  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Press to change the channel of the built-in  
TV tuner.  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
10 G-Code™ (page 40)  
DVD RECORDER  
Press then use the number buttons to enter  
a G-Code programming number for timer  
recording.  
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 80)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the  
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.  
G-Code is a trademark of Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
The G-Code system is manufactured  
under license from Gemstar Development  
Corporation.  
2
Remote control indicator  
Lights when setting up the remote control  
for use with a TV (page 129) and when  
setting the remote control mode (page 116).  
11 DVD playback functions  
3
STANDBY/ON  
AUDIO (page 35, 61)  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
Changes the audio language or channel.  
(When the recorder is stopped, press to  
change the tuner audio.)  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
SUBTITLE (page 61)  
Displays/changes the subtitles included  
in multilingual DVD-Video discs.  
PAUSE  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
ANGLE (page 62)  
Switches camera angles on discs with  
multi-angle scenes.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
12 PLAY MODE (page 58)  
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for  
features such as search, repeat and  
program play).  
CM BACK (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively  
backward through the audio or video  
playing.  
13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 55, 68) / TOP  
MENU (page 52)  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,  
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized  
DVD-R/-RW disc is loaded.  
CM SKIP (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively  
forward through the audio or video  
playing.  
PREV / NEXT  
14 MENU (page 52)  
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-  
Video disc is loaded.  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/  
chapter/track/folder; or to display the  
previous or next menu page.  
15 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.  
Press ENTER to select the currently  
highlighted option.  
/ STEP / SLOW (page 57)  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback; while paused, press to  
show the previous or next video frame.  
16 HOME MENU  
21 Recording controls (page 36)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from  
which you can navigate all the functions of  
the recorder.  
REC  
Press to start recording. Press  
repeatedly to set the recording time in  
blocks of 30 mins.  
17 RETURN  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen  
menu or display.  
STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
18 HELP  
Press for help on how to use the current GUI  
screen.  
REC MODE (page 36)  
Press repeatedly to change the  
recording mode (picture quality).  
19 DISPLAY (page 63)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information  
displays.  
TIMER REC (page 38)  
Press to start setting a timer recording.  
20 Playback controls (page 51)  
22 TV CONTROL (page 129)  
After setting up, use these controls to  
control your TV.  
REV SCAN / FWD SCAN  
(page 57)  
Press to start reverse or forward  
scanning. Press again to change the  
speed.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03  
Controls and displays  
Display  
1
2
3
4
5
6
PM  
L
R
P
10  
9
8
7
1
(page 108)  
Lights during playback; blinks when  
playback is paused.  
Lights when the component video output  
is set to progressive scan (except in  
some cases when a component is  
connected using HDMI).  
2
Lights when copying.  
SAP (page 35) (Taiwan and Philippines  
model only)  
Lights when the currently selected TV  
channel has a Second Audio Program  
channel.  
3
Lights during recording; blinks when  
recording is paused.  
4
PM  
Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the  
6
Recording quality indicators (page 36)  
clock display.  
XP  
5
(page 38)  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
XP (best quality).  
Lights when a timer recording has been  
set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has  
been set to DVD but there isn’t a  
recordable disc loaded, or the timer has  
been set to HDD but the HDD is not  
recordable.)  
SP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
SP (standard play).  
LP / SLP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
LP (long play) or SLP (super long play).  
NTSC  
Lights when the video output signal  
format is NTSC.  
EP / SEP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
EP (extended play) or SEP (super  
extended play).  
(page 109)  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
Indicates which channels are recorded  
when dual mono is selected.  
MN  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
MN (manual recording level) mode.  
Other:  
Indicates which channels of a bilingual  
broadcast are recorded.  
7
8
Character display  
R / RW  
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded:  
DVD-R or DVD-RW.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
9
AUTO  
2 3 (page 116)  
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been  
set, and during Auto Start Recording.  
Shows the remote control mode (if  
nothing is displayed, the remote control  
mode is 1).  
10 PL (page 68)  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded  
and the recorder is in Play List mode.  
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode  
disc is loaded.  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
ONE  
TOUCH  
COPY  
STANDBY/ON  
STOP  
REC  
REC  
CH  
+
USB  
DV IN  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
(MONO)  
INPUT 2  
10  
9
12 13 14 15  
11  
DVR-745H-S  
1
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
REC  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to  
set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.  
2
3
Disc tray  
10 Front panel inputs (page 15)  
See Front panel connections on page 15 for  
more information on these.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
4
HDD/DVD indicator  
11 ꢆ  
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk  
(HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD  
drive is selected.  
Press to start or restart playback.  
12 ꢇ  
Press to stop playback.  
5
HDMI indicator  
Lights when this recorder is connected to  
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.  
13 CH +/–  
Use to change channels, skip chapters/  
tracks, etc.  
6
HELP FUNCTION  
Press to display the on-screen help.  
14 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 80)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the  
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.  
7
HDD/DVD  
Press to switch between the hard disk drive  
(HDD) and DVD for recording and playback.  
15 STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
8
Front panel display and IR remote  
sensor  
See Display on page 26 for details.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
04  
Getting started  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
Switching on and setting up  
ENTER  
4
Start the Setup Navigator.  
When you switch the recorder on for the first  
time, you can make several basic settings  
using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes  
you through setting the clock, the internal TV  
tuner and the video output.  
k
Complete this setup before you  
t
start using your recorder.  
e
P
Start  
Cancel  
p
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
If you’re using the recorder for the first time,  
we strongly recommend you use the Setup  
Navigator before starting to use the  
recorder.  
• If you don’t want to use the Setup  
Navigator, press to select Cancel,  
then press ENTER to exit the Setup  
Navigator.  
Important  
ENTER  
• Some of the Setup Navigator on-screen  
displays (OSDs) in this section vary  
slightly depending on the country or  
region of purchase.  
5
Select an option then press  
ENTER.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
k
AutoChannel Setting  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
er
P
Antenna  
Cable  
p Do not Set  
1
Switch on your TV and set the video  
Other:  
input to this recorder.  
STANDBY/ON  
k
AutoChannel Setting  
2
Switch on the recorder.  
er
P
AutoScan  
Do not Set  
When you switch on for the first time, your  
TV should display the Setup Navigator  
screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t  
appear, you can also access it from the  
Initial Setup menu; see page 106).  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip  
channel setup (because they have  
already been set up, for example).  
• You can go back to the previous screen  
at anytime in the Setup Navigator by  
pressing RETURN.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a language (then  
press ENTER).  
ENTER  
Language  
Select your country.  
English  
Español  
Italiano  
Português  
k
t
Country Selection  
eCountry  
P
Taiwan  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Auto-tuning channels  
Manual clock setting  
The Auto Scan option automatically scans  
and sets the channel presets.  
If no stations in your area are  
broadcasting time signals, you can set  
the clock manually.  
Tuning  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to set your  
time zone.  
32/68  
Cancel  
You can set this by selecting a city or a  
time relative to GMT.  
ENTER  
1/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic  
Time Zone  
Taiwan  
Taipei  
er
P
time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock  
manually.  
p D.S.T
Off  
k ClockSetting  
Press then use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to  
select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for daylight  
saving/summer time, then press  
ENTER.  
Select On if you are currently using  
daylight saving/summer time.  
e
P
Auto  
Manual  
Auto clock setting  
Some TV channels broadcast time  
signals together with the program. This  
recorder can use these signals to set the  
clock automatically.  
1/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
Time Zone  
Taiwan  
Taipei  
er
P
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel  
preset number that broadcasts a time  
signal, then move the cursor down to  
‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
p D.S.T
On  
Set the date and time, then press  
ENTER to make all the settings.  
Taiwan and Philippines model: The date  
is in month/day/year format.  
k AutoClock Setting  
Date  
––  
––  
/
:
––  
/
––––  
e
Time  
–– AM  
Other: The date is in day/month/year  
format.  
P
p
Clock Set CH  
2
Start  
2/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
Date  
er
1
/
:
01  
/
2006 SUN  
The recorder takes a short while to set  
the time. After you see that it’s set, select  
Next to proceed.  
P
Time  
p
Time Zone  
12  
00 AM  
Taiwan  
Taipei  
D.S.T  
On  
k AutoClock Setting  
Date  
1
/
01  
12  
/
2006 SUN  
00 AM  
e
Time  
• Use the ꢃ/ꢂ buttons to change the  
value in the highlighted field.  
:
P
p
Clock Set CH  
2
Start  
Next  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to move from one  
field to another.  
• Press ENTER to finish setting the time.  
If the time could not be set  
automatically, press RETURN to go back  
to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
04  
Getting started  
• If there are blank channels with no  
station, you can set these to skip using  
the manual channel setting. See Manual  
CH Setting on page 107.  
ENTER  
7
Select the TV screen type,  
‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.  
k
TVScreen Size  
e
P
Wide (16:9)  
Standard (4:3)  
p Navigator  
ENTER  
8
Select whether or not your TV  
is compatible with progressive scan  
video.  
k
Progressive  
e
P
Compatible  
Not Compatible  
p Don't Know  
• Note that progressive scan video is only  
output through the component video  
outputs and only when the video source  
is NTSC (see Using other types of video  
output on page 17).  
ENTER  
9
Press to continue after reading  
the HDD caution.  
k Inthe event of HDD failure, recordings may  
be lost or normal playback/recording may  
not be possible.  
e
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD  
P
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only  
as temporary storage media.  
p
Please copy recordings you want to keep  
to recordable DVD.  
Press ENTER to continue.  
ENTER  
10  
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit  
the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you  
want to start again.  
k
Setting  
Setupis complete!  
eEnjoy using your DVD recorder!  
Finish Setup  
p
Go Back  
That completes basic setup using the Setup  
Navigator.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
CRhaepcteor 5rding  
About DVD recording  
Important  
The table below shows the maximum  
number of titles recordable per disc and the  
maximum number of chapters per title:  
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-  
RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R  
DL and DVD+R DL media.  
Max.  
chapters  
(per title)  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized  
for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each  
has its advantages, and it depends on what  
you want to do with the recording which  
mode you choose.  
Disc type/rec.  
format  
Max. titles  
(per disc)  
DVD-R/-RW  
Video mode  
99  
99  
49  
99  
*1  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM  
VR mode  
If you want to edit your recordings in any  
significant way, VR mode offers greater  
possibilities for cutting, copying, and  
changing the way the video is presented.  
999  
*2  
DVD+R/+RW  
99  
*1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.  
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to  
editing, but it has the advantage that it is  
compatible with standard DVD players  
*2  
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.  
• This recorder cannot play or record  
unfinalized Video mode and DVD+R  
discs recorded on another recorder.  
DVD+RW discs recorded on another  
recorder are playable on this recorder  
but are not recordable.  
1
(many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).  
Once a disc is initialized for a particular  
mode, all recording on that disc will be in  
that mode.  
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR  
• The maximum continuous recording  
time for one title is eight hours when  
using a DVD+R/+RW disc.  
mode recording.  
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR  
mode recording.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW  
disc, the total number of recordable  
titles remaining may not increase.  
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL,  
SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix  
multiple TV line systems on one disc. A  
disc can contain PAL and SECAM  
recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See  
also Additional information about the TV  
system settings on page 116.  
Note  
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating  
instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
• If power to the recorder is cut (due to a  
power outage, the plug being pulled  
from the power outlet, etc.) during  
recording, editing, initializing, finalizing  
or other operation, some recorded  
material on the disc, or the disc itself,  
may become unusable. In this case, try  
re-initializing the disc (DVD-RW only), or  
use a new disc. Pioneer is not  
About HDD recording  
Recording to the internal hard disk drive  
(HDD) is very flexible; you have the full  
choice of recording quality options,  
including manual mode, and of course you  
can record, erase and re-record as many  
times as you like.  
The capacity of the hard disk drive means  
that you can store many hours of video on it,  
even using the higher quality recording  
modes.  
responsible for lost recordings,  
damaged discs or other losses in these  
cases.  
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on  
a disc can affect playback and/or  
recording performance. Please take  
proper care of your discs.  
Important  
• The maximum number of titles/chapters  
per title that can be recorded on the  
HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more  
recording is possible on the HDD after  
the maximum number of titles has been  
reached.  
• See also Disc / content format playback  
compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc  
compatibility information.  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
discs  
• The maximum continuous recording  
time for one title is 12 hours.  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is  
generally the same as recording to regular  
single-layer discs; however, please note the  
following points:  
• It is possible to record both PAL and  
NTSC titles on the HDD. Before  
recording, you need to make sure that  
the Input Line System setting (page 116)  
matches the TV line system of the source  
you’re recording.  
• When the recorder switches from the  
first layer to the second during recording  
a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new  
title is automatically started on the new  
layer.  
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-  
R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is  
being recorded when the layer is  
switched, recording will stop.  
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a  
DVD+R DL disc.  
• You cannot play, record additional  
material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or  
DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded  
on but not yet finalized on another DVD  
recorder.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
HDD Video mode compatibility  
When recording to the HDD you can choose  
to record in one of two formats. Set the  
format from the HDD Recording Format  
item in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 113).  
Recorded audio  
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is  
recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format  
(only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby  
Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When  
set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high  
quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed  
copying from HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-  
RW or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When  
recording a broadcast with a Secondary  
Audio Program (SAP) channel, set which  
channel you want to record from the Initial  
Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on  
page 109).  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel  
and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/  
-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the  
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode  
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the AUDIO  
button to select the Mono, Stereo or SAP  
audio channel to record before recording  
starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then  
both the main and SAP audio channels will  
be recorded and you can switch on playback.  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off, high-speed copying isn’t possible.  
However, when SAP is selected as the  
broadcast audio channel, both the main and  
SAP channels are recorded and you can  
switch the audio on playback.  
The table below shows the different audio  
output possibilities:  
Other:  
Audio output  
Audio  
setting  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed  
copying from HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-  
RW or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When  
recording a bilingual broadcast, set which  
channel you want to record from the Initial  
Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on  
page 109).  
Left (L)  
Right (R)  
L + R  
R
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
L + R  
L
L + R  
SAP  
Other:  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off, high-speed copying isn’t possible.  
However, both channels of bilingual  
broadcasts are recorded and you can switch  
the audio on playback.  
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you  
are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW,  
DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or  
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual  
Recording setting (page 109) to select the A/  
L or B/R audio channel to record before  
recording starts. In other cases, both  
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be  
recorded and you can switch on playback.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
Recording equipment and  
copyright  
Restrictions on video  
recording  
Recording equipment should be used only  
for lawful copying and you are advised to  
check carefully what is lawful copying in the  
country in which you are making a copy.  
Copying of copyright material such as films  
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a  
legal exception or consented to by the  
rightowners.  
You cannot record copy-protected video  
using this recorder. Copy-protected video  
includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite  
broadcasts. If copy-protected material is  
encountered during a recording, recording  
will pause automatically and an error  
message will be displayed on-screen.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be  
recorded to HDD, CPRM-compatible VR  
mode DVD-R/-RW (see below), or DVD-RAM.  
When recording a TV broadcast or through  
an external input, you can display copy  
control information on screen. (see  
Displaying disc information on-screen on  
page 63).  
Using the built-in TV tuner  
CPRM  
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling  
system developed for the recording of ‘copy  
once’ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for  
Content Protection for Recordable Media.  
There are three different ways to select TV  
channels. Note that you can’t change the TV  
channel during playback, recording or  
during recording standby.  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which  
means that you can record copy-once  
broadcast programs, but you cannot then  
make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-  
compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0 / 8x or higher) or  
DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted  
in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.  
CH  
CH +/– buttons  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
ABC  
JKL  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible  
with CPRM.  
Number buttons  
For example, to select channel 4, press 4  
then ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4,  
1
ENTER.  
CH +/– buttons on the front panel  
Note  
1 • Taiwan and Philippines model: Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered  
1 through 125.  
34  
En  
Other: Channel presets are numbered 1 through 99.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Other:  
Changing audio channels  
You can change the audio channel of the  
broadcast or external input signal.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
Some TV programs are broadcast with both  
a main and a Second Audio Program (SAP).  
You can change the TV audio using the  
AUDIO button.  
AUDIO  
Press to change the audio type.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-  
screen.  
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM  
Select on page 108) is set to NICAM and  
you are watching a NICAM broadcast,  
you can switch between NICAM and  
Regular (non-NICAM) audio.  
AUDIO  
Press to change the audio type.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-  
screen.  
Mono  
SAP  
NICAM  
Stereo  
Regular  
• If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP  
channel being broadcast, you will still  
hear the main audio channel.  
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you  
can also select the language.  
NICAM A  
Regular  
NICAM B  
• If the sound is poor quality when set to  
Stereo, you can often improve it by  
changing to Mono.  
NICAM A+B  
• You can also select the language for a  
non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.  
Note  
A (L)  
B (R)  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,  
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM  
setting, only one channel of a dual mono  
broadcast is recorded. In this case,  
decide which language you want to  
record before recording by setting the  
Dual Mono Recording setting (see Dual  
Mono Recording on page 109).  
A + B (L+R)  
• When watching a recording made from  
an external input with Bilingual  
recording selected (see External Audio  
on page 108), you can switch the audio  
channel between left (L), right (R) or both  
(L+R).  
L
R
L+R  
Note  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,  
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM  
setting, only one channel of a bilingual  
broadcast is recorded. In this case,  
decide which language you want to  
record before recording by setting the  
Bilingual Recording setting (see  
35  
En  
Bilingual Recording on page 109).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest  
video quality but gives about ten hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
Setting the picture quality/  
recording time  
1
MN1 to MN32 / LPCM – Manual /  
Linear PCM (available only when manual  
recording is on)  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Before starting a recording, you will usually  
want to set the picture quality/recording  
time. There are six standard settings  
available, which allow you to choose a  
balance between picture quality and  
recording time.  
The setting is indicated in the front panel  
display, and shown on-screen together with  
the recording time for a blank recordable  
disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for  
that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On  
Screen Display setting (see On Screen  
Display on page 115) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
When Manual Recording is set to On (see  
Manual Recording on page 112), a further  
option will be available (MN1 to MN32 or  
LPCM, depending on what you set).  
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the  
longest recording time available. If you  
select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording  
mode will automatically revert to SLP.  
Basic recording from the TV  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
REC MODE  
Basic recording from the TV involves just  
setting the channel to record, choosing  
whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and  
selecting the recording quality.  
Press repeatedly to select the  
recording quality.  
XP – High quality setting, gives about  
one hour of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
SP (Standard Play) – Default quality,  
used for most applications, gives about  
two hours of recording time on a DVD.  
DVD for recording.  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a  
recordable disc (if you load a new blank  
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder  
takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than  
SP, but doubles the recording time on a  
DVD to about four hours.  
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R  
or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must  
initialize it before proceeding (see  
Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 50).  
EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than  
LP, but gives about six hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality  
than EP, but gives about eight hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
Note  
1 • Taiwan and Philippines model: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality.  
When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select which audio channel to record (see Dual Mono Record-  
ing on page 109).  
Other: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilin-  
gual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 109).  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
The only exception to this is when the  
picture quality is set to LPCM, in which  
case you do need to select the audio  
channel before recording.  
CH  
2
Select a TV channel to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel  
number:  
REC  
5
Start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press  
the REC button repeatedly. The recording  
time increases in 30 minute increments, up  
to a maximum of six hours. The time the  
recording will end is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display. When the recording  
ends, the recorder automatically switches  
into standby if no other operation is being  
performed.  
Channel number  
• While the recorder is stopped, you can  
also use the number buttons on the  
remote to select the channel (For  
channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).  
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also  
use the CH +/– buttons on the front  
panel to select the channel number.  
• To cancel the set recording time, press  
REC.  
REC MODE  
• If you want to pause recording at any  
time , press PAUSE. Press again to  
restart the recording (If recording to the  
HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new  
chapter is started after recording  
restarts).  
3
Set the picture quality/recording  
1
time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 36 for detailed instructions.  
AUDIO  
4
Select the audio channel to  
STOP REC  
record.  
6
Press to stop recording.  
• If you set the recording time in the  
previous step, you can still stop the  
recording anytime by pressing STOP  
REC.  
See Changing audio channels on page 35 for  
more on this.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
• When recording in VR mode (DVD) or  
with HDD Recording Format set to Video  
Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SAP  
audio channels are recorded, allowing  
you to switch the audio channel on  
playback. The only exception to this is  
when the picture quality is set to LPCM,  
in which case you do need to select the  
audio channel before recording.  
• Recording will stop automatically when  
there is no more space on the HDD/  
DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording  
(whichever is sooner).  
Other:  
• When recording in VR mode, if a  
broadcast is bilingual, both audio  
channels are recorded, allowing you to  
switch the audio channel on playback.  
Note  
37  
En  
1 Except during Chase Play.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
Setting a timer recording  
Important  
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are  
already 32 timer programs waiting to be  
recorded.  
A L L  
Using the timer recording features you can  
program up to 32 timer recordings up to a  
month in advance. Timer recording  
programs can be set to record just once,  
every day, or every week.  
• Timer recording will not start if:  
– The recorder is already recording.  
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or  
unfinalized.  
• Timer recording will start when the  
operation preventing timer recording  
has finished.  
There are three ways to program a timer  
recording; using the Easy Timer Recording  
feature (see Easy Timer Recording below),  
using the G-Code programming system (see  
Timer recording using the G-Code™  
programming system on page 40), or using  
manual timer recording (see Setting a  
manual timer recording on page 41).  
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front  
panel display when the timer is active. If  
the indicator is blinking it means that  
(for a DVD timer recording) there is no  
disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not  
recordable (for an HDD timer recording  
it means that the HDD is not recordable).  
You can set the recording quality for your  
timer recording in the same way as for a  
regular recording, but with the added option  
of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the  
recording quality for the space available on  
the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a  
blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).  
• Approximately two minutes before a  
timer recording is set to start, the  
recorder will go into timer recording  
standby. In timer recording standby you  
cannot use some functions.  
• The maximum length for timer  
You can set timer recordings to record to a  
recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For  
regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer  
recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.  
However, because one title (HDD) is  
limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12  
hours will be spread over two titles. Note  
that there will be a break in the recording  
of a few seconds between titles.  
recordings that you don’t need to keep, you  
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature  
to automatically replace the previous timer  
recording with the new one. Note that when  
you use this feature, the previous recording  
made on that timer program will be replaced  
by the next one, regardless of whether you  
have watched it yet or not.  
Easy Timer Recording  
As the name suggests, Easy Timer  
Recording makes setting up a timer  
recording as simple as possible.  
You can also set the recorder so that it will  
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the  
recording on to the disc if it would not  
otherwise fit at the recording quality you set  
(see Optimized Rec on page 112 for more on  
this).  
Important  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record  
to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD  
loaded at the time of the recording, the  
Recovery Recording feature will  
automatically record the program to the  
HDD for you.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Timer Recording’ then  
‘Easy Timer’ from the Home Menu.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set  
the timer recording for up to a month in  
advance). Each column is a 15 minute  
interval.  
PREV  
NEXT  
2
Set the TV channel to  
record.  
Easy Timer Recording  
The darker area represents time that has  
already passed and can’t therefore be  
selected. The lighter area is time that’s  
available.  
AM  
PM  
12:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
1:00  
2:00  
1/01  
1/02  
1/03  
1/01  
SUN  
9:30  
AM  
SP  
– ––:––  
ENTER  
6
Set the start time.  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
7ch  
HDD  
The start date and time is displayed in the  
middle of the screen.  
REC MODE  
• You can go back and reset the start time  
if you need to by pressing RETURN.  
3
Set the recording quality.  
DVD recording: The AUTO option  
automatically sets the best recording  
quality for the space available on the  
disc loaded at the time of recording.  
7
Move the cursor to the  
recording end time on the grid.  
HDD recording: The AUTO option  
automatically sets the best recording  
quality that would fit on to a blank DVD  
disc.  
Recording start time  
Recording end time  
Easy Timer Recording  
AM  
11:00  
PM  
12:00  
HDD  
DVD  
4
DVD for recording.  
Select the HDD or  
1:00  
2:00  
3:00  
4:00  
5:00  
1/01  
1/02  
1/03  
1/01  
SUN  
11:45  
AM  
1:45  
PM  
5
Move the cursor to the  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
7ch  
SP  
HDD  
recording start date and time on the grid.  
• You can move the cursor forward or back  
an hour at a time using the REV  
SCAN and FWD SCAN buttons.  
As you move the cursor around the grid, an  
arrow stretches from the start time to the  
current cursor position, representing the  
length of the recording. A recording of up to  
six hours can be set.  
Current time  
Recording start time  
Easy Timer Recording  
ENTER  
8
Set the end time.  
AM  
8:00  
PM  
12:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
1:00  
2:00  
1/01  
1/02  
1/03  
9
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer  
1/01  
SUN  
11:45  
AM  
SP  
– ––:––  
recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to  
the Easy Timer Recording screen.  
• You can check the timer recording  
details you just set from the main timer  
recording screen (see Setting a manual  
timer recording on page 41).  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
7ch  
HDD  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
3
Confirm that the settings are correct.  
Timer recording using the G-  
If the channel number isn't displayed, use  
the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight CH, then use  
the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to set the correct channel  
number.  
Code™ programming system  
This system makes programming timer  
recordings very simple. Most TV guides  
publish G-Code programming numbers with  
their program details. If you want to make a  
timer recording of a program, you just input  
the corresponding code. The date, start, stop  
and channel settings are made  
automatically. All you have to do is tell the  
recorder the recording mode, and whether  
it’s a once-only recording or a regular  
recording.  
• If the channel number is set, but  
incorrectly, set up the guide channel  
(see G-Code CH Setting on page 107).  
4
Select ‘Store Program’ to finish.  
• Other options in the same menu panel  
allow you to name the program, and  
change the recording destination and/or  
recording mode.  
Note that if the country setting is incorrect  
(set in the Setup Navigator), timer  
recordings made using the G-Code  
programming system may not work as  
expected.  
Checking/editing timer recording  
settings  
You can check and/or edit the timer  
recording settings made by the G-Code  
system by selecting Details from the G-  
Code# setting screen.  
1
Press ‘G-Code’ to display the G-Code  
program screen.  
You can also access this screen from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select  
Timer Recording, then  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Details’ from the G-  
G-Code system).  
Code# setting screen.  
The Timer Program Set screen appears,  
filled out with the timer recording details.  
G-Code#  
2
Check and edit the fields as  
necessary.  
See Setting a manual timer recording on  
page 41 for more on this.  
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
3
6
9
Cancel  
Details  
Enter  
ENTER  
Clear  
3
Select ‘Store Program’ to save  
the timer program and exit.  
• Use the number buttons to enter the G-  
Code programming number. (To clear  
the last digit entered, press CLEAR.)  
• You can also use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to select digits from the on-  
screen display.  
2
After making the settings, select  
‘Enter’ and press ENTER.  
The timer recording screen appears with the  
timer program you just set.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
G-Code programming with the  
power off  
You can enter a G-Code programming  
number when the recorder is in standby.  
Setting a manual timer recording  
The timer recording screen you can see all  
the timer programs already set, clear  
programs and set up new ones.  
Note that the recording is always made to  
the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc,  
you’ll need to switch on the power and use  
the full G-Code program screen.  
1
Press TIMER REC to display the Timer  
Recording screen.  
You can also access the Timer Recording  
screen from the Home Menu (press HOME  
MENU, select Timer Recording, then Timer  
Recording).  
Important  
This screen shows all the timer programs  
currently set.  
• You can’t use this feature until you have  
set up the guide channels. See G-Code  
CH Setting on page 107.  
Timer Program View  
3/26 SUN 3:00PM  
Tmr Pgms 3/32  
OK  
• You can’t change the recording mode.  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
3/26 SUN 6:00PM  
World Journey  
7:00PM  
9:00PM  
10ch  
4ch  
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer  
recordings.  
OK  
3/27 MON 7:30PM  
Flower  
Until 4/20  
MON  
FRI 1:30PM  
2:00PM  
8ch  
New Input  
1
Press ’G-Code’.  
The front panel display shows the current  
recording mode and prompts you to enter  
the G-Code programming number.  
HDD Remain  
DVD Remain  
59h59m(SP)  
1h59m(SP)  
• Each row is for one timer recording  
program, with the date and time  
information, channel, recording mode,  
DVD or HDD and recording status.  
2
Use the number buttons to enter the  
number.  
• The amount of free space available on  
the HDD and the currently loaded  
recordable DVD is shown towards the  
bottom of the screen.  
• To clear the last digit entered, press  
CLEAR.  
• In the upper-right corner, the number of  
timer programs already set is shown  
next to Tmr Pgms.  
3
Press ENTER.  
The display shows the timer settings:  
Date Start time End time HDD and  
Recording channel Recording mode.  
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display,  
check that the number is correct and  
that the guide channel is set (see G-Code  
CH Setting on page 107), then set the  
timer recording again.  
• If there are more than five timer  
programs already set, press NEXT  
to switch page (go back using the ꢍ  
PREV button).  
• You can also delete a timer program  
before it’s started (before the recorder  
enters timer recording standby) by  
highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See  
also Deleting a timer program on  
page 43.  
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it  
means that although you entered a valid  
number, the program has already  
finished.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
2
Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer  
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases  
the previous daily or weekly recording when  
the next one is recorded.  
program, then press ENTER.  
Timer Program Set  
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD  
recording only).  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
CH  
10ch  
Date  
EVERYDAY  
Start  
Stop  
Extend  
30 min  
Dual Mono/Bilingual Recording – Select  
which channel of a dual mono/bilingual  
broadcast to record (necessary if recording  
to a Video mode DVD or to the HDD with the  
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode  
On).  
6:00PM  
7:00PM  
Store Program  
Detailed Settings  
Record To  
Recording Mode  
Auto Replace Rec.  
Genre  
Enter Details  
HDD  
XP  
On  
Set Detailed  
Set Title Name  
Cancel  
No Category  
L
Dual Mono Recording  
HDD Recording Format Video Mode On  
HDD Recording Format – Select Video  
Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on  
whether you need high-speed copying to  
Video mode DVD capability or not.  
3
Enter the timer recording settings.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a field; use  
the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to change the value.  
CH – Choose a channel (2 to 69 for  
antenna channels; 1 to 125 for cable/Pr 1  
to Pr 99, excluding skip channels), or one  
of the external inputs from which to  
record.  
5
After entering all the timer recording  
information, highlight ‘Store Program’  
and press ENTER.  
The timer recording list screen is displayed  
again. The timer program you just input  
appears in the list. The rightmost column  
shows various timer recording status  
messages:  
Date – Choose a date up to one month in  
advance, or select a daily or weekly  
program.  
OK – Can be recorded.  
Start – Set the recording start time.  
Time Over – Not enough space on the  
HDD (the recording won’t finish).  
Stop – Set the recording end time  
(maximum length of a timer recording is  
24 hours).  
Over 12h – Recording time of over 12  
hours set (when recording to the HDD  
the recording will be split into two titles).  
Extend – Extend the end time of the  
timer recording (select Off, 30, 60, 90 or  
120 mins.)  
Overlap – Two timer programs partially  
or completely overlap. The one starting  
earlier will take priority.  
4
If you want to change the recording  
mode, recording destination, etc., select  
‘Set Detailed’.  
Until ... (eg., Until 8/13) – For a regular  
recording, the last program that could  
be recorded is shown.  
In this area you can set:  
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk  
recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select  
HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or  
weekly timer recording only).  
Data Over –Can’t record because the  
disc management area of the disc is full.  
• Cancel Once – A regular timer program  
is set to skip.  
Recording Mode – Select XP, SP, LP, EP,  
SLP or SEP, (See Setting the picture quality/  
recording time on page 36). If Manual  
Recording is on, then you can also select the  
LPCM setting, or MN (press ENTER then use  
the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the level).  
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.  
Title Over – Can’t record because there  
is already the maximum number of titles  
on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99).  
• Recording – The program is currently  
42  
En  
recording.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• Standby – The recorder is in timer  
recording standby.  
Editing a timer program  
You can change any of the settings in a timer  
program before the recording is due to start.  
nothing displayed – Another timer  
recording or copying is in progress.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
6
To exit the timer recording screen,  
2
Highlight the timer program you  
press HOME MENU.  
want to change.  
3
Press then select ‘Modify’ from the  
Tip  
command menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
• To enter a title name for the timer  
recording in advance, select Set Title  
Name and follow the on-screen display.  
The Timer Program Set screen appears from  
which you can edit the settings.  
4
Edit the timer recording settings as  
Note  
necessary.  
• If you set a DVD timer recording but  
there is no recordable DVD disc loaded,  
or the disc loaded doesn’t have enough  
free space for the complete recording,  
Recovery is shown. In this case (unless  
you load a suitable disc before the  
recording actually starts), the recorder  
will use the HDD for recording. (The  
message Can’t Rec will appear if there  
are already 999 titles on the HDD or if  
there is not enough free space on the  
HDD for recording.)  
5
Select ‘Store Program’ to finish.  
Confirm the settings you made from the  
following screen.  
Deleting a timer program  
You can delete timer programs you no longer  
need.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
2
Highlight the timer program you  
want to erase  
.
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized  
Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 112) is  
set to On, the recorder will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the  
recording on the disc. If the recording  
will not fit onto the disc even on MN1  
(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) recording  
quality then the Recovery Recording  
feature will automatically make the  
recording to the HDD instead.  
3
Press then select ‘Erase’ from the  
command menu panel.  
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.  
• You can also just press CLEAR when the  
timer program is highlighted.  
• If there is very little free space left on the  
HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may  
not complete successfully.  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or  
high-speed copying when an Auto  
Replace Recording is due to start, the  
new timer recording will not replace the  
old one. However, the next time the timer  
recording starts, both of the older two  
programs will be erased.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
Skipping a regular timer program  
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer  
program, you can set the recorder to skip the  
next scheduled recording.  
2
Highlight the timer recording  
you want to change.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
ENTER  
2
Highlight the timer program you  
3
Press then select ‘Modify’  
want to skip.  
from the command menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
3
Press then select ‘Cancel Once’  
from the command menu panel.  
• In the timer program list, Cancel Once  
appears by the program.  
The Timer Program Set screen appears, from  
which you can edit the settings.  
• You can also just press PAUSE when  
ENTER  
the timer program is highlighted.  
4
Edit the end time as  
necessary.  
You can also edit the Extend time  
parameter.  
Extending a timer recording in  
progress  
You can extend a timer recording beyond the  
programmed end time in two different ways.  
This can be useful if a broadcast program  
overruns, for example.  
ENTER  
5
6
Select ‘Store Program’.  
HOME  
MENU  
Canceling or extending the timer  
Press to exit the Timer Recording  
REC  
screen.  
1
Press and hold for three seconds  
during a timer recording.  
Stopping a timer recording  
Recording continues, but the timer indicator  
disappears from the front panel display  
indicating that the timer has been canceled.  
STOP REC  
1
Press during a timer recording.  
REC  
ENTER  
2
Press repeatedly to extend  
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.  
recording in 30 minute blocks.  
Preventing use of the recorder  
before a timer recording (child  
lock)  
Programming a new end time  
You can edit the end time of a timer  
recording you have previously set.  
You can make all the front panel and remote  
control buttons inoperative using the child  
lock feature. This is useful when you set a  
timer recording and want to make sure that  
the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Timer Recording’ then  
‘Timer Recording’ from the Home Menu.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
STANDBY/ON  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback (Chase Play)  
1
If the recorder is on, switch it  
into standby.  
HDD  
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for  
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording  
that is still in progress from the start, without  
having to wait until the recording has  
finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the  
recording).  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching  
the recording in progress. You can watch  
anything else already on the HDD (or on a  
DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by  
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen  
(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD on page 55).  
three seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK.  
If any buttons are pressed on the remote or  
front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again.  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢇ  
STOP on the front panel (while the  
recorder is stopped) for three seconds  
until the display shows UNLOCK.  
Timer recording FAQ  
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the  
recording input.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder  
doesn’t start recording!  
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is  
recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on  
page 99), and that there are fewer than  
99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.  
Important  
• You can’t use this feature during Auto  
Start Recording, or in Auto Start  
Recording standby (the AUTO indicator  
is lit in the front panel display).  
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer  
program! Why not?  
PLAY  
You can’t enter a timer program if the  
clock isn’t set.  
• What happens when two or more timer  
programs overlap?  
Press during recording to  
start playback from the beginning of the  
1
current recording .  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
Basically, the program with the earlier  
recording start time has priority.  
However, the recorder will start  
recording the program with the later  
start time after the earlier program is  
finished. If two programs have the same  
times (but different channels, for  
example), the program set most recently  
takes priority.  
Press during recording to  
select another title to play.  
You can use all the usual playback controls,  
such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and  
skip.  
• To stop playback, press STOP  
(recording will continue).  
• To stop recording, press STOP REC  
(playback will continue).  
Note  
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work  
while copying or backing up.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
• During recording or in timer recording  
standby, you can’t play an HDD title,  
DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the  
Input Line System setting doesn’t match  
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title  
(see also Additional information about  
the TV system settings on page 116).  
Also, during simultaneous recording  
and playback, if the TV line system of the  
playback track/title changes then  
• To watch video coming in via the DV  
input (front panel), select DV > DV  
Video Playback from the Home Menu  
(see also Playing from a DV camcorder on  
page 64).  
REC MODE  
3
Set the recording quality.  
See Setting the picture quality/recording time  
on page 36 for detailed information.  
playback will automatically stop.  
HDD  
DVD  
4
Select the HDD or  
DVD for recording.  
Recording from an external  
component  
REC  
5
Press to start recording.  
If your source is copy-protected using Copy  
Guard, you will not be able to record it. See  
Restrictions on video recording on page 34 for  
more details.  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
You can record from an external component,  
such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to  
one of the recorder’s external inputs.  
Automatic recording from a  
satellite tuner  
1
Make sure that the component you  
want to record from is connected  
properly to the DVD recorder.  
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for  
connection options.  
HDD  
If you have a satellite tuner or some other  
kind of set top box connected to the INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the  
recorder start and stop recording  
automatically with the timer settings of the  
connected component. (If the other  
INPUT  
SELECT  
2
Press repeatedly to select one of  
the external inputs to record from.  
The current input is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display:  
L1 – Input 1 / Auto Start Rec  
L2 – Input 2 (front panel)  
L3 – Input 3  
component doesn’t have a built-in timer,  
you’ll need to use it with an external timer  
unit.)  
1
After setting up for Auto Start Recording,  
this recorder starts recording when it  
detects a signal from the other component.  
When the signal ceases, the recorder stops  
recording.  
Check that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you  
want them (see Audio In on page 108).  
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed  
or stretched), adjust on the source  
component or your TV before recording.  
If you want to use this recorder with the  
timer features of your satellite tuner, see  
Language code list on page 130.  
Note  
1 You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:  
– the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby.  
– the HDD is not recordable.  
46  
En  
– the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press ꢅ  
STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in  
standby. The AUTO indicator goes off.  
Important  
• It takes a little while for this recorder to  
switch on and start recording after  
detecting a signal. Please bear this in  
mind when setting the timer.  
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not  
start if another timer recording is in  
progress.  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once  
recording has already started, press ꢂ  
REC for three seconds (this cancels Auto  
Start Recording, but recording  
continues), then STOP REC to stop  
recording.  
• Timer recordings take precedence over  
Auto Start Recording. Auto Start  
Recording will stop if a timer recording is  
due to start. After the timer recording  
has finished, Auto Start Recording will  
resume.  
• You can also stop recording by pressing  
STOP REC then selecting Yes to  
confirm.  
Tip  
• Alternatively, with no OSD displayed,  
press and hold the front panel STOP REC  
button for more than three seconds to  
switch Auto Start Recording on directly.  
After switching on, switch the recorder  
into standby.  
1
Set the timer for the satellite receiver  
(or other component), then switch it into  
standby (if necessary).  
Check the manual that came with the  
receiver if you’re not sure how to do this.  
2
Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for  
‘External Audio’ and ‘Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording’ are as  
you want them.  
See Audio In on page 108 for more on these  
settings.  
3
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording  
quality. See Setting the picture quality/  
recording time on page 36 for detailed  
information.  
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer  
Recording’, then ‘Auto Start Recording’.  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start  
Recording on, or ‘No’ to switch off.  
If you choose ‘Yes’ the recorder  
automatically goes into standby.  
The AUTO indicator in the front panel  
display lights.  
The recorder will automatically switch on  
and start recording when the other  
component comes on. Recording stops  
when the external component switches off.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
Finalizing a disc  
Playing your recordings on  
other DVD players  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc  
so that it can be played on a regular DVD  
player or computer equipped with a suitable  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized  
discs recorded in Video mode and DVD+R  
discs. A number of players (including many  
Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW  
discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not.  
Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R  
discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and  
DVD recorders may be able to (finalization  
might be necessary). Check the manual that  
came with the player to check what kinds of  
discs it will play.  
1
DVD-ROM drive.  
Note that the disc name will appear in the  
title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure  
the disc name is as you want it before you  
finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc,  
see Input Disc Name on page 99 before  
starting the steps below.  
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need  
finalizing. However, if you want a title menu  
to appear when you play the disc, then you  
will need to finalize. When using a  
DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even  
after finalizing. although the title menu will  
disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc  
again to generate a new title menu.  
When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R  
disc, a title menu is created from which you  
can select titles when you play the disc.  
There are a number of different styles of title  
menu to choose from to suit the content of  
the disc.  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual  
way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to  
display the menu, then using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/  
followed by ENTER to select titles and  
start playback.  
Important  
• Once you’ve finalized a Video mode or  
DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record  
anything else on that disc. However, the  
finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe  
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 100  
for how to do this.  
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-  
R DL) disc can still be recorded and  
edited on this recorder even after  
finalizing.  
• Video mode DVD-R DL discs and  
DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in  
order to play in other recorders/players.  
Note however that some recorders/  
players will not play even finalized dual-  
layer discs.  
Note  
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize  
the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 116 for how to change the recorder’s  
setting.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW  
or DVD+R/+RW disc is going to take  
more than around four minutes, you can  
press ENTER to cancel. Around four  
minutes before completion, the option to  
cancel disappears.  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped  
before proceeding.  
HOME  
MENU  
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR  
mode DVD-R disc.  
Home Menu.  
• How long finalization takes depends on  
the type of disc, how much is recorded  
on the disc and the number of titles on  
the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can  
take up to one hour to finalize. Video  
mode DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW  
discs can take up to 20 minutes.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >  
‘Next Screen’.  
Disc Setup  
Next Screen  
Start  
Basic  
Finalize  
Undo Finalize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
ENTER  
4
For Video mode and DVD+R/  
+RW discs only, select a title menu style,  
then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or  
‘No’ to cancel.  
The menu you select will be the one that  
appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for  
a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD  
player.  
Finalize  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the  
Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not  
support this feature. These discs will  
have only a text title menu when finalized  
on this recorder.  
5
The recorder will now start finalizing  
the disc.  
During finalization:  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05  
Recording  
HOME  
MENU  
Initializing recordable DVD  
discs  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video  
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either  
Video mode recording or VR mode  
recording.  
Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize  
DVD+RW’.  
1
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for  
recording automatically. By default, blank  
DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode  
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on  
page 112 if you want to change the default to  
Video mode.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Basic  
VR Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Video Mode  
Initialize DVD+RW  
Optimize HDD  
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recordings out of the box; if you want to use  
a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must  
initialize it before recording anything on the  
disc.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the  
disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take  
up to 1 hour).  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be  
initialized in order to erase the contents of  
the disc.  
Initializing disc  
7ch  
1 min left  
Important  
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or  
DVD-RAM disc will erase everything  
recorded on it. Make sure there is  
nothing on the disc that you want to  
keep!  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a  
DVD-RW disc in a different format if it  
was originally initialized on an older DVD  
recorder.  
• Once initialized for VR mode recording,  
you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to  
Video mode.  
Note  
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize  
it for Video mode recording.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
CPhlaapteyr b6 ack  
Introduction  
Basic playback  
Most of the features described in this  
chapter make use of on-screen displays.  
Navigate these using the cursor buttons and  
ENTER. To go back one level from any  
screen, use the RETURN button.  
A L L  
This section shows you how to use your  
recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD,  
etc.), and for playback of video from the  
HDD.  
Remember also that the button guide at the  
bottom of every screen shows which buttons  
do what.  
Important  
Many of the functions covered in this  
chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video  
CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs  
and CDs, although the exact operation of  
some varies slightly with the kind of disc  
loaded.  
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’  
means any kind of playable or recordable  
DVD. If a function is specific to a  
particular kind of DVD disc, it is  
specified.  
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and  
DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain  
playback controls to operate at certain  
points in the disc. This is not a  
malfunction.  
• Many functions are not available when a  
Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start  
playback from the Disc Navigator screen  
for non-PBC playback (see Using the  
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs  
on page 56).  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files,  
see The PhotoViewer on page 91.  
DVD for playback.  
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3  
below.  
Important  
Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
2
Load a disc.  
Load a disc with the label side facing up,  
using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if  
you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video  
disc, load it with the side you want to play  
face down).  
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD,  
please first read the note on page 53.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06  
Playback  
PLAY  
Press to skip to previous/next  
chapter/title. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
DVD+R/DVD+RW only: ꢍ  
PREV may not always skip to  
the previous title.  
PREV  
NEXT  
3
Start playback.  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video  
CD, a disc menu may appear when you  
start playback. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc  
menus, and the number buttons and  
ENTER for Video CD menus.  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Except VR mode: During play-  
back, enter a chapter number  
then press ENTER to skip  
directly to that chapter within  
the currently playing title.  
On some discs, you can also  
use the number buttons to  
select numbered items in the  
disc menu.  
VR mode only: During playback,  
enter a title number then press  
ENTER.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a  
number entry and start again.  
• When playing video from the HDD,  
playback will automatically stop after the  
end of a title is reached.  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
• There may be a slight pause when  
playback switches from the first to the  
second layer of a dual-layer disc.  
ENTER  
• See the following sections for more  
details on playing specific kinds of discs.  
STOP  
4
5
Press to stop playback.  
When you’ve finished using the  
recorder, eject the disc and switch the  
recorder back into standby.  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
BACK CM SKIP  
Playing DVD discs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD  
discs.  
Press to start slow-motion play-  
back. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame in either direc-  
tion.  
STEP/SLOW  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from  
the place last stopped.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
Press to display the menu of a  
DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW  
discs finalized on this recorder  
will display the Disc Navigator.  
Press MENU to display the disc  
menu.)  
MENU  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing ꢆ  
PLAY. (Press STOP again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
Use the cursor buttons to navi-  
gate DVD-Video disc menus;  
press ENTER to select items.  
ENTER  
Press to start scanning. Press  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous  
level of a DVD-Video disc menu.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Playing from the HDD  
Press to start slow-motion play-  
back. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame in either direc-  
tion.  
STEP/SLOW  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls when playing video recorded on the  
hard disk (HDD).  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from  
the place last stopped. Play-  
back automatically stops after  
the end of a title is reached.  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
1
controls for audio CDs , and WMA/MP3  
files.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing ꢆ  
PLAY. (Press STOP again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
Except WMA: Press to start  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
scanning. Press again to  
increase the scanning speed.  
(There are two scan speeds; the  
current scan speed is shown  
on-screen.)  
Press to skip to previous/next  
PREV  
NEXT  
chapter/title. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
During playback, enter a title  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that title.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
Press to skip to previous/next  
PREV  
NEXT  
GHI  
track (or folder for WMA/MP3  
disc). (During playback you can  
also use the front panel CH +/–  
buttons.)  
PQRS  
TUV  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
During playback, enter a track  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
ENTER  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
BACK CM SKIP  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
Note  
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with  
a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that Stereo is selected  
53  
En  
using the  
AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 62).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06  
Playback  
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.  
Video CD only: Each press skips  
backward/forwardprogressively  
up to a maximum of ten min-  
utes forward or three minutes  
back. Note that this function  
doesn’t work when playing in  
PBC mode.  
BACK CM SKIP  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC  
for short) menus. These discs show PBC in  
the display when you load them and display  
a menu on-screen from where you can select  
1
what to watch.  
Press to start slow-motion play-  
back. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed (for-  
ward only).  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame (forward only).  
STEP/SLOW  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
Video CD only: If RESUME is dis-  
played on-screen, playback  
starts from the place last  
stopped.  
RETURN  
Press to display the disc menu  
of a Video CD/Super VCD play-  
ing in PBC mode.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
Video CD only: You can resume  
playback from the same point  
by pressing PLAY. (Press ꢇ  
STOP again to cancel the  
resume function.)  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
Press to skip to previous/next  
PREV  
NEXT  
track.  
When a PBC menu is dis-  
played, press to display the pre-  
vious/next page. (During  
playback you can also use the  
front panel CH +/– buttons.)  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
During playback, enter a track  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
While a PBC menu screen is  
displayed, use to select num-  
bered menu items.  
ENTER  
Note  
1 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not avail-  
able. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator  
(see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 56).  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Playing DivX video files  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for DivX video files.  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
recordable discs and the HDD  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse  
and edit video on recordable DVDs and the  
HDD, and to view information on titles.  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from  
the place last stopped. Play-  
back of titles (DivX files) pro-  
ceeds in alphabetical order.  
See also Editing on page 67 for more on  
editing recordable discs.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing ꢆ  
PLAY. (Press STOP again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
DVD.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
2
Open the Disc Navigator.  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
PAUSE  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
Press to start scanning. Press  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Recent First  
All Genres  
MENU  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Press to skip to previous/next  
PREV  
NEXT  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
title. (During playback you can  
also use the front panel CH +/–  
buttons.)  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator  
from the Home Menu.  
Press to start slow motion play-  
back (press repeatedly to  
change the slow motion play  
speed).  
STEP/SLOW  
While paused, press to advance  
one frame.  
3
Browse the list of titles.  
• Use the PREV / NEXT buttons  
to display the previous/next page of  
titles.  
AUDIO  
Press to display the playback  
audio type; press repeatedly to  
change the playback audio  
type.  
• To change the thumbnail picture  
displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on  
page 72.  
SUBTITLE  
Press to display subtitle  
information; press repeatedly to  
change subtitles.  
• For HDD recordings, you should be able  
to see a thumbnail title digest. If it  
doesn’t display, set Set Preview to  
Normal. See Set Preview on page 116.  
Using the Disc Navigator to  
browse the contents of a disc  
ENTER  
4
Play the highlighted title.  
• You can also select Play from the  
command menu options.  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the  
contents of a disc and start playback.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06  
Playback  
Changing the display style of the  
Disc Navigator  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
playback-only discs  
You can choose to display titles in the Disc  
Navigator in various different ways, sorted  
alphabetically, by recording date, by genre,  
and so on. You can also choose whether to  
display four or eight titles on the screen at  
the same time.  
WMA/MP3  
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD  
DivX  
HOME  
MENU  
1
2
Display the Home Menu.  
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.  
ENTER  
1
Display the View Options  
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD  
or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC  
NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to  
the Disc Navigator screen.  
panel.  
The View Options panel  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
ENTER  
Style  
4
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Titles  
3
Select what you want to play.  
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort order  
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Depending on the type of disc you have  
loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly  
different, but they are all navigated in the  
same way.  
Recent First  
MENU  
Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
All Genres  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX  
disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title  
within a folder that you want to play.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
ENTER  
Disc Navigator  
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or  
Folder (01-03)  
01.Rock  
Track(001-004)  
001.Intro  
CD  
‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the  
available view options.  
WMA/MP3  
Divx  
02.Pop  
002.Escape  
03.Dance  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
Style – Select four or eight titles per  
screen view  
Sort order – Sort by date (most recent  
first), unwatched first, title name or  
recording date (oldest first)  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks  
and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you  
can switch the playback area between  
CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. This can only  
be done while the disc is stopped.  
Genre – Display all genres or just a  
selected genre  
ENTER  
3
Choose a view option, then  
press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to  
the new display preferences.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Scanning discs  
Playing in slow motion  
A L L  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
(except WMA)  
You can scan discs at various speeds,  
forwards or backwards.  
You can play video at various slow motion  
speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be  
played in slow motion in either direction,  
while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles  
can only be played forwards in slow motion.  
1
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
1
During playback, start  
reverse or forward scanning.  
There is no sound when playing in slow  
motion.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
STEP/SLOW  
1
Press to start slow motion  
2
Press repeatedly to change  
reverse or forward play.  
the scanning speed.  
There are four scanning speeds available  
when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX  
title. Reverse playback is also possible with  
STEP/SLOW  
2
Press repeatedly to change  
the slow motion speed.  
The current playback speed is indicated on-  
screen.  
2
HDD and DVD video.  
There are two scanning speeds for other  
types of disc.  
PLAY  
PLAY  
3
Resume normal playback.  
3
Resume normal playback.  
Note  
1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.  
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear PCM is output from the coaxial digital output, except during chase playback  
and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when using other scan speeds.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the  
coaxial digital output during forward SCAN 1).  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD  
disc.  
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06  
Playback  
Search Mode  
Frame advance/frame  
reverse  
A L L  
The Search Mode feature lets you start  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
playback from a specified point in a disc by  
2
time or by title/chapter/folder/track  
You can advance or back up video on a DVD  
number.  
1
disc or the HDD frame-by-frame.  
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles,  
you can only use frame advance.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from  
PAUSE  
the Play Mode menu, then choose a  
search option.  
The available search options depend on the  
1
2
Pause playback.  
STEP/SLOW  
type of disc.  
Back up or advance one  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
frame with each press.  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
PLAY  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/  
3
Resume normal playback.  
track number or a search time.  
The Play Mode menu  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.01.00  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
A L L  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to  
search functions, repeat and program play  
functions.  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25  
minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0,  
0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds  
into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
PLAY MODE  
Press  
to display the Play Mode  
menu.  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2  
minutes and 30 seconds into the current  
track, press 2, 3, 0.  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For  
example, for track 6, press 6.  
ENTER  
3
Start playback.  
• You can also access the Play Mode  
menu from the Home Menu (press  
HOME MENU).  
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press  
HOME MENU or PLAY MODE.  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.  
2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat play  
A L L  
DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX  
There are various repeat play options,  
depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if  
you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also  
possible to use repeat play together with  
program play to repeat the tracks/chapters  
in the program list (see Program play  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to  
specify two points (A and B) within a track or  
title that form a loop which is played over  
1
and over.  
ENTER  
2
below).  
1
During playback, select ‘A-B  
Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play  
ENTER  
Mode menu, then choose a repeat play  
mode.  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’  
highlighted, press at the point you want  
the loop to start.  
Play Mode  
Repeat Disc  
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Play Mode  
A (Loop Start)  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
Program  
• To resume normal playback, select  
Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu,  
or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as  
the Play Mode menu) is displayed.  
ENTER  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted,  
press at the point you want the loop to  
end.  
Playback immediately jumps back to the  
start point and plays the loop round and  
round.  
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode  
DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end  
points of the loop must be in the same  
title.  
• To resume normal playback, select Off  
from the A-B Repeat menu, or press  
CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play  
Mode menu) is displayed.  
Note  
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.  
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06  
Playback  
PLAY  
Program play  
4
Play the program list.  
WMA/MP3  
HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD  
Program play remains active until you  
cancel program play, erase the program list,  
eject the disc or switch off the recorder.  
This feature lets you program the play order  
of titles/chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or  
1
the HDD.  
Tip  
ENTER  
• To save your program list and exit the  
program edit screen without starting  
playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY  
MODE.  
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play  
Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit Program’.  
The Input/Edit Program screen varies  
according to the disc type. Below is the DVD  
input screen.  
• During program play, press NEXT to  
skip to the next program step.  
Program  
• To repeat play the program list, select  
Program Repeat from the Repeat Play  
Mode menu (see Repeat play on  
page 59).  
Step  
01.001  
02.  
Title (01-03)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Chapter(001-015)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
Chapter 005  
Chapter 006  
Chapter 007  
Chapter 008  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Title 03  
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch  
off program play (if no menu OSD, such  
as the Disc Navigator, is displayed).  
Press while stopped to erase the  
program list.  
ENTER  
2
Select a title, chapter, folder  
• From the Program menu you can also:  
Start Program Play – Starts playback of  
a saved program list  
or track for the current step in the  
program list.  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/  
chapter/folder/track, the step number  
automatically moves down one.  
Cancel Program Play – Turns off  
program play, but does not erase the  
program list  
Erase Program List – Erases the  
program list and turns off program play  
• To insert a step into the program list,  
highlight the step number where you  
want to insert another step, then select a  
chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent  
steps move down one.  
• To delete a step from the program list,  
highlight the step you want to delete,  
then press CLEAR.  
3
Repeat step 2 to build up a program  
list.  
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/  
chapters/folders/tracks.  
Note  
1 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be some-  
times be played, depending on the disc.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Displaying and switching  
subtitles  
Switching DVD and DivX  
soundtracks  
DVD-Video DivX  
DVD-Video DivX  
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in  
one or more languages; the disc box will  
usually tell you which subtitle languages are  
available. You can switch subtitle language  
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title  
recorded with two or more soundtracks  
(often in different languages), you can  
2
switch the soundtrack during playback.  
1
during playback.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the  
soundtrack options.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the  
subtitle options.  
AUDIO  
Change the audio soundtrack.  
SUBTITLE  
Select/change the subtitle  
The current audio language is shown on-  
language.  
screen and in the front panel display.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-  
screen and in the front panel display.  
• The sound may drop out for a few  
seconds when switching soundtracks.  
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE  
then CLEAR.  
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital  
and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog  
audio output when DTS is selected. To  
listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect  
this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV  
amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder  
via the digital output. See Connecting to  
an AV amplifier or receiver on page 20 for  
connection details.  
Note  
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to  
access.  
• To set subtitle preferences, see on page 111.  
2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to ac-  
cess.  
• To set audio language preferences, see on page 110.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06  
Playback  
Switching audio channels  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
CD Video CD  
Stereo – Stereo (default)  
1/L – Left channel only  
2/R – Right channel only  
WMA/MP3  
Super VCD  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
1
For HDD and VR mode content that has  
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo  
(default)  
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel  
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel  
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo  
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel  
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel  
both a main and a SAP (Secondary Audio  
Program) audio channel, you can switch  
between main (L), SAP (R), or both (L+R).  
2
Other:  
1
For HDD and VR mode content recorded  
with bilingual audio, you can switch between  
left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or both  
(L+R).  
Switching camera angles  
2
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you  
can switch between stereo, just the left  
channel or just the right channel.  
DVD-Video  
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot  
from two or more angles—check the disc  
box for details: it should be marked with a  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the  
same icon appears on screen to let you know  
that other angles are available (this can be  
switched off if you prefer—see Angle  
Indicator on page 114).  
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks.  
With these discs you can switch between the  
two soundtracks as well as individual  
channels in each.  
AUDIO  
Press repeatedly to display/  
switch the audio channel.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are  
indicated on-screen.  
ANGLE  
Switch the camera angle.  
• The angle number is displayed on-  
screen.  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts  
again with the new angle.  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left/main channel only  
R – Right/SAP channel only  
Other:  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left channel only  
R – Right channel only  
Note  
1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 113).  
2 When playing a Dual Mono recording/Bilingual Recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby  
Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby  
Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 109) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the  
audio channel.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Shows recording restrictions for  
the current channel program  
Displaying disc information  
on-screen  
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
7ch  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Resume  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
Rem. 0h35m  
You can display various on-screen  
information about the disc loaded or the  
HDD.  
Disc Name  
:
Comedy shows  
DISPLAY  
Indicates copy-protected material  
Indicates a multi-angle scene  
Display/change the on-screen  
information.  
• Press once to show the HDD and  
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity  
together. Press again to show the status  
of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable  
disc).  
Play  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21  
Chapter Total 0h01m52s  
ꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌ  
4.32Mbps  
Title Name  
:
11/21 soccer game  
Indicates the data transfer rate  
• To hide the information display, press  
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.  
Tip  
• See Switching camera angles on page 62  
for more on multi-angle scene  
switching.  
HDD and removable disc activity  
display  
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and  
removabledisc(DVD, etc.)activity. Usethe  
HDD and DVD button to switch between the  
two kinds of display.  
• When using the simultaneous play and  
record feature, the display shows  
information for playback only.  
• During real-time copy, the copy source  
playback information is displayed.  
The example displays below show high-  
speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD  
chase playback.  
• The Video mode disc displays become  
the same as a DVD-Video disc once the  
disc is finalized.  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
• The total recording time figure shown in  
parenthesis is calculated based on a  
12 cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed  
record setting.  
HDD  
Hi-Speed Copy  
HDD DVD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
0h08m left  
• Recording and playback times for TV  
recordings are approximately 0.1 %  
shorter than the actual time. This is  
because of the slightly different frame  
rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
• The frame number is shown next to the  
elapsed time display when the disc is  
paused.  
Recording time  
Copy Once or Can’t Record messages  
may appear in the stop or recording  
displays. These indicate that the  
broadcast TV program contains copy  
control information.  
Relative playback position  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
CPhlaapteyr i7ng and recording from a  
DV camcorder  
You can play back and record video from a  
DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack  
on the front panel of this recorder.  
connected to the DV jack, or the signal is  
copy-protected, recording will pause. It  
will automatically restart once there is a  
recordable signal.  
• The recorder will only start recording  
from the DV IN jack if there is a valid  
signal. Recording will pause if the signal  
is interrupted during recording.  
Important  
• If you connect a second recorder using a  
DV cable, you cannot control the second  
unit from this one.  
• If your source is copy-protected using  
Copy Guard, you will not be able to  
record it. See Restrictions on video  
recording on page 34 for more details.  
• You can’t control this unit remotely from  
a component connected to the DV IN  
jack.  
Playing from a DV camcorder  
Recording from a DV  
camcorder  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control  
both the camcorder and this recorder.  
2
From the Initial Settings menu, check  
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
require.  
See DV Input on page 109 for more on this.  
Important  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD  
format.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as  
you want them (see Audio In on  
page 108).  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled  
using this recorder’s remote.  
• You can’t record date and time  
information from DV cassette.  
HOME  
MENU  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape  
is blank, or has copy-protected material  
on it, this recorder will pause recording.  
Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal.  
However, if there is more than 10  
seconds of blank tape, this recorder will  
stop recording and the camcorder  
should stop (depending on the  
3
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video  
Playback’ from the Home Menu.  
4
Start playback on the camcorder.  
Images from the camcorder should appear  
on your TV.  
• To record the incoming video, press  
HDD/DVD to select the HDD or a DVD  
for recording, then press REC. Press  
STOP REC to finish recording.  
camcorder).  
If there is no signal from the device  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
07  
• For best results when recording from a  
DV camcorder to this recorder, we  
ENTER  
recommend cueing the camcorder to  
the place you want to start recording  
from and setting the camcorder to play-  
pause.  
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.  
Stop  
1.02.22  
Stop  
Control with these  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
buttons  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
HDD  
Rem.  
SP (2h00m/DVD)  
32h45m  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
REC MODE  
• You can pause or stop the recording by  
selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from  
the on-screen display. You cannot  
control the camcorder from this remote  
control during recording.  
2
Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 36 for detailed information.  
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check  
• If you restart recording after stopping the  
camcorder, the first few seconds of the  
camcorder tape will not be recorded.  
Use the pause button on your camcorder  
instead and recording will start  
immediately.  
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
require.  
See DV Input on page 109 for more on this.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as  
you want them (see Audio In on  
page 108).  
HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:  
A chapter marker is inserted every time  
there is a break in the timecode on the  
DV tape. This happens when the  
recording is stopped or paused then  
restarted, for example.  
HOME  
MENU  
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV  
Source’ from the Home Menu.  
• DV recording only works when the DV  
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape  
loaded.  
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording  
screen during recording, press DISPLAY  
to hide it (press again to display).  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV  
recording screen using the HOME  
MENU or RETURN button.  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk  
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.  
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape  
that you want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point  
from which you want to record.  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can  
use this recorder’s remote to control the  
camcorder using the , , , ,  
, and buttons.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
About DV  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with  
the recorder!  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-  
1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to  
this recorder using a DV cable for input of  
audio, video, data and control signals.  
Check that the DV cable is properly  
connected. Also make sure that what  
you’re trying to record is not copy-  
protected.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are  
trademarks.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off  
the camcorder then switch back on.  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-  
format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital  
satellite receivers and Digital VHS video  
recorders are not compatible.  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
• You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at a time to this recorder.  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see  
DV Input on page 109) between Stereo 1  
1
• You cannot control this recorder from  
external equipment connected via the  
DV IN jack.  
and Stereo 2.  
DV video setting  
• It may not always be possible to control  
the connected camcorder via the DV IN  
jack.  
Use this setting to adjust the picture quality  
of the incoming video from the DV device  
connected to the DV jack of this recorder.  
• DV camcorders can usually record audio  
as stereo 16-bit / 48 kHz, or twin stereo  
tracks of 12-bit / 32 kHz. This recorder  
can only record one stereo audio track.  
Set the DV Input setting as required  
(see DV Input on page 109).  
HOME  
MENU  
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video  
Setting’ from the Home Menu.  
For detailed information on this setting,  
see Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs on page 102.  
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be  
32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).  
• Picture disturbance in the recording  
may occur if the source component  
pauses playback or plays an unrecorded  
section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable is  
disconnected.  
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is  
no output functionality.  
Note  
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You  
can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 108).  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
CEhdapitetri8ng  
Editing options  
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.  
DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode),  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM  
HDD  
(VR mode)  
Original  
Play List  
Create (page 69)  
Play (page 70)  
Erase (page 70)  
Edit > Title Name (page 70)  
Edit > Set Thumbnail  
(page 72)  
Edit > Erase Section  
(page 72)  
Edit > Divide (page 73)  
Edit > Chapter Edit  
(page 74)  
Edit > Set Genre (page 75)  
Edit > Lock (page 75)  
Edit > Move (page 76)  
Edit > Combine (page 76)  
Genre Name (page 77)  
Multi-Mode (page 77)  
Undo (page 78)  
*1  
*1  
*1 DVD-R/-RW only  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08  
Editing  
The Disc Navigator screen  
Press to display the command  
menu panel. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER  
buttons to navigate the menus.  
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can  
edit video content on unfinalized Video mode  
and VR mode DVD-R/-RW discs, DVD+R/  
+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video  
content on the internal hard disk drive.  
PREV  
NEXT  
When in the title list, press to  
display the previous/next page if there  
are more titles than can be displayed.  
Important  
DISPLAY  
Press to change the title  
information displayed in the title list.  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
HDD  
DVD  
Press to switch  
• Titles that have been recorded with a  
Input Line System setting different to the  
current setting of the recorder are shown  
in the Disc Navigator with a blank  
thumbnail image. See also Additional  
information about the TV system settings  
on page 116.  
between the HDD and DVD Disc  
Navigator screens.  
• If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
or DVD-RAM disc you can display the  
Play List by selecting Play List from the  
view options panel (press , then select  
Play List from the view options, then  
Play List).  
• During recording, if you display the Disc  
Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
may appear with a  
mark. These titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Style  
were recorded with a Input Line System  
setting different to the current setting of  
the recorder. During recording, these  
titles cannot be played.  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
PlayList  
Original  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
• Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
are timer recordings set to Auto Replace  
Recording (see Setting a manual timer  
recording on page 41).  
DVD.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
2
Display the Disc Navigator  
• Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon are recently recorded titles that  
haven’t yet been played.  
screen.  
Playback will automatically stop when you  
do this.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible  
from the Home Menu.  
3
Press to exit the Disc  
Navigator.  
View options panel  
Title list  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10
9
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Selected  
title  
2h00
(1.0)
m
G
4
Titles  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Available  
recording time  
Title thumbnail Title information Command  
menu panel  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Editing accuracy  
Create  
Some editing commands ask you whether  
you want to keep Video mode compatibility  
or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible  
Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Use this function to create a Play List and  
add titles to it.  
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The  
edit point is accurate to the exact frame you  
choose. However, this accuracy is not  
preserved in any copy you make if you use  
the high-speed copy function to make a  
Video mode DVD.  
Before you can use this command, make  
sure that the Play List is switched on in the  
view options panel on the left.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Create’ from the  
Video mode compatible editing is less  
precise. The edit point you choose will only  
be accurate to within 0.5 to 1 second. On the  
other hand, these edit points will be  
command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
preserved if you use high-speed copy to  
make a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW.  
Play  
No title  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
Play List  
Create  
HDD genres  
The large capacity of the HDD means that  
there may be many hours of video in the  
recorder. To help you organize your HDD  
video content you can assign different  
genres to titles. There are 14 genres in total,  
including ten user-definable ones that you  
can name as you like.  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
ENTER  
2
Select an original title to add  
to the Play List.  
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles  
as necessary to the Play List.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08  
Editing  
Play  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Select ‘Erase’ from the  
to erase.  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
ENTER  
2
1
Highlight the title you want  
command menu panel.  
to play.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
2
Select ‘Play’ from the  
to cancel.  
command menu panel.  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
Tip  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing  
CLEAR when the title is highlighted.  
Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Play  
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch
Genre Name  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch
lti-Mode
Recent first  
All Genres  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
Title Name  
M
u
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
You can give titles new names of up to 64  
characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and  
HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for  
Video mode recordings and DVD+R/+RW  
discs.  
Erase  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.  
When you erase titles from the HDD or  
Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the  
available recording space increases  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to name (or rename).  
accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video  
mode DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases  
the available recording time only if it is the  
1
last title on the disc.  
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a  
DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R,  
will not result in any more free space on the  
disc.  
Note  
70  
En  
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’  
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name  
from the command menu panel.  
and return to the main Disc Navigator  
screen.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator  
screen without saving changes to the  
title name, press RETURN.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
Divide  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name  
The table below shows the remote control  
key shortcuts that you can use to input  
characters in the name input screen.  
Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through  
the characters shown.  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
Lock
12/02Sat 10:00PM
C
ancel
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
ENTER  
3
title.  
Input a name for the selected  
If you want to enter two characters in  
succession that are both on the same button  
(for example a P and an R), press FWD  
SCAN to advance the cursor one space  
manually between inputting the two  
characters.  
Input Title Name  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
Key  
1
Characters  
Key  
6
Characters  
~
+
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
2
3
1
¿
. , ’ ? ! – & 1  
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó  
ø ñ  
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
a b c 2 ä à á â ã  
æ ç  
p q r s 7 $  
2
7
*1  
ÿ/ß  
• A name generated automatically by the  
recorder will already be in the name  
input section of the screen. Use the ꢊ  
REV SCAN / FWD SCAN buttons to  
change the cursor position.  
d e f 3 è é ë ê  
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡  
j k l 5 £  
t u v 8 ü ù û ú  
3
4
8
9
w x y z 9  
0
5
0
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper  
or lower-case, or use the CASE  
SELECTION buttons (PREV / ꢎ  
NEXT).  
[cursor back]  
[cursor for-  
ward]  
ꢍ/ [change case] CLEAR [clear charac-  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to  
delete characters directly (press and  
hold for two seconds to delete the whole  
name). For other remote control key  
shortcuts, see Using the remote key  
shortcuts to input a name below.  
ter]  
<space>  
[finish name  
input]  
~
+
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # % ¥ | + =  
{ } [ ] < >  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD  
recorder, you will see only a limited  
character set.  
*1  
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08  
Editing  
Set Thumbnail  
Erase Section  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
You can change the thumbnail picture that  
appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to  
any frame that appears in that title.  
Using this command you can delete a part of  
a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial  
breaks in a recording made from the TV.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
1
Highlight the title containing  
to change the thumbnail picture for.  
the section you want to erase.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’  
from the command menu panel.  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from  
from the command menu panel.  
which you can find the frame you want.  
ENTER  
3
edit.  
HDD only: Select the type of  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Erase Section  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
Divide  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
Lock  
12/02Sat 10:00PM
Cancel
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
30h30m  
3
Use the playback controls (, , ,  
, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 69.  
press ENTER to set.  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
find the start of the section to erase, then  
press ENTER.  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates  
the current play position in the title. After  
pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of  
the section.  
10-1  
00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
OK  
Exit  
You can also use the chapter and time  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
search features (press PLAY MODE), and  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
the  
CM SKIP and  
CM BACK buttons.  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
10-1  
00.00.09.15  
ENTER  
Play Pause  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the  
OK  
Exit  
Edit screen.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
4
Use the playback controls (, , ,  
ENTER  
, etc.) to find the place you want to  
divide the title.  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the  
same way, find the end of the section to  
erase, then press ENTER.  
Divide Title (HDD)  
After pressing ENTER, another marker  
indicates the end of the section, with the  
section itself marked in red.  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
10–1  
00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
ENTER  
Divide  
Cancel  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few  
seconds of video either side of the marked  
section to see how the edit will look.  
ENTER  
5
Press to divide the title at the  
current playback position.  
• When editing VR mode Original content,  
you may not be able to erase very short  
sections (less than five seconds).  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Divide  
Divided titles cannot  
be combined.  
OK?  
!
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Yes  
No  
Use this command to divide a title into two.  
Note that once divided, the two new HDD  
titles cannot be recombined into one again.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to divide.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from  
the command menu panel.  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 69.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08  
Editing  
You can keep dividing the chapter as  
many times as you wish (up to 999  
chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or  
99 chapters per HDD title).  
Chapter Edit  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD  
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on  
the HDD you can edit individual chapters  
within a title, with commands for erasing,  
combining and dividing.  
1
2
Erase /Move – Erase or move  
chapters: Select the chapter you want to  
erase/move and press ENTER. Select  
whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
1
Highlight the title that contains the  
chapters you want to edit.  
Move command only: Select the  
destination for the chapter, and press  
ENTER.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’  
from the command menu panel.  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
12/03Sun 11:00PM
Erase  
Rec. time  
Chapter  
1
Move  
0
Cancel  
ENTER  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
3
edit.  
HDD only: Select the type of  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
DVD RECORDER  
!
3
Combine – Combine two adjacent  
chapters into one: Highlight the bar  
divider between two adjacent chapters  
and press ENTER.  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Rec. time  
003  
1h00m  
001  
002  
004  
005  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 69.  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
4
Select the command you want:  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or  
more parts: Use the playback controls  
(, , , , etc.) to find the point at  
which you want to divide the chapter,  
then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the  
main Disc Navigator screen.  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Rec. time  
Chapters  
1h00m  
5
1–1  
Play  
0.00.00  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
Note  
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.  
2 VR mode Play List only.  
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been  
divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into  
one.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Set Genre  
Lock  
HDD  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
Original only  
Use this command to assign a genre to a  
title.  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited  
or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it,  
you can always unlock it later.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to assign a genre to.  
Important  
• You can’t undo any edits made before  
changing the lock status. You also can’t  
undo a lock/unlock command using the  
Undo option from the Disc Navigator  
menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from  
the command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
1
Highlight the title you want to lock  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 
(or unlock).  
Title name  
e
t
T
h
u
m
b
nail  
S
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
Divide  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
ENTER  
Set Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM Lock
12/02Sat 10:00PM
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the  
Cancel
command menu panel.  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 
Title name  
e
t
T
h
u
m
b
nail  
S
4
Titles  
ENTER  
Erase Section  
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
Divide  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 
3
Select a genre for the title.  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM Lock
12/02Sat 10:00PM
8
7
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
Cancel
10Titles  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 
No Category  
Remain  
4
Titles  
Free1  
30h30m  
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 
Free2  
Free3  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Free4  
An unlocked title will become locked; a  
locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles  
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a  
padlock icon.  
Free5  
8
7
12/02 SAT 10:00P
Free6  
12/02Sat 10:00PM
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08  
Editing  
Move  
Combine  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Play List only  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing  
order of Play List titles.  
Use this function to combine two Play List  
titles into one.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to move.  
to combine.  
This title will remain in the same place after  
combining with another title.  
ENTER  
2
command menu panel.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from  
the command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
2
3
4
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 
Title name  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
Se
t
T
h
u
m
b
n
ail  
4
Titles  
10Titles  
EraseSection  
Divide  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 
1
2
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
Move  
12/02 SAT 10:00PCombine  
12/02Sat 10:00PM
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Cancel  
Play List  
MENU  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
1h00m(1.0G)  
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
ENTER  
3
Select a new position for the  
title.  
ENTER  
3
Select another title to  
combine with the first.  
Title to move  
This title will be appended to the first title  
selected.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be  
appended to title 1:  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
2
3
4
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Play List  
MENU  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1h00m(1.0G)  
1
2
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
DVD  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
VR Mode  
4
Titles  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
0h30m  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
Play List  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Insert position  
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play  
List is displayed.  
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
DVD  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
• For information on remote control key  
short cuts, see Using the remote key  
shortcuts to input a name on page 71.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Input Genre Name  
OK to combine titles  
Free  
1
!
1
and 3  
?
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
Yes  
No  
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
2
3
1
¿
´
Genre Name  
Space  
OK  
Clear  
HDD  
Use this command to rename one of the ten  
user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 10).  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name  
and exit.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the  
Multi-Mode  
command menu panel.  
HDD  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Multi-Mode allows you to select several  
titles, then select a command that will be  
applied to all of them. In this way you can  
select multiple titles and then erase them all  
at once, for example.  
Play  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch
Recent first  
All Genres  
Genre Name  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch
Multi-Mode  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
ENTER  
Remain  
30h30m  
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the  
command menu panel.  
ENTER  
2
Select one of the user-  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
definable genre names.  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
Play  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
Recent first  
All Genres  
10  
Genre Name  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM Free1  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch
Multi-Mode  
Free2  
4
Titles  
Free3  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
Free4  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9
Free5  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Free6  
Free7  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
12/02Sat 10:00PM
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
ENTER  
Remain  
30h30m  
2
Select titles from the title list.  
Selected titles are marked with a .  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the genre.  
• The name can be up to 12 characters  
long.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08  
Editing  
Frequently asked questions  
ENTER  
3
Select the command that you  
• Why doesn’t the available recording time  
increase when I erase titles from a VR  
mode DVD-R?  
want applied to all the marked titles.  
For example, select Erase to erase all the  
marked titles.  
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or  
DVD+R), the titles are no longer  
displayed, but the content remains on  
the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once  
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
10Titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4c
Erase  
Lock  
2
4
Titles  
Unlock  
9
Change Genre  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03Sun 8:00PM 9ch
Single Mode  
12/02Sat 10:00PM 7ch
Recent first  
All Genres  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM  
• I can’t edit my disc!  
You may find that as the available  
recording time is reduced on a VR mode  
DVD-R disc, editing is no longer  
11/29 WED 7:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
possible. This is because information  
about your edits requires a certain  
amount of disc space. As you edit, this  
information builds up, eventually  
preventing you from editing further.  
Once the command is completed, Multi-  
Mode is automatically exited.  
Undo  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can  
generally undo it. There is one level of undo  
(in other words, you can only undo the last  
edit you made).  
ENTER  
Select ‘Undo’ from the  
command menu panel.  
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the  
Disc Navigator screen.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
No title  
Play  
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
Play List  
Create  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
CChaoptpery9 ing and backup  
Restrictions on copying  
Introduction  
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected  
using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be  
copied to the HDD.  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on  
the HDD to a DVD.  
Some video material is copy-once protected.  
This means that it can be recorded to HDD,  
but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you  
want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a  
CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW,  
ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM-  
compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on  
page 34 for more on this). Only one instance  
of a copy-once protected title can be added  
to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,  
the title is erased from the HDD (it is  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the  
HDD to play in another player.  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD  
for editing.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to  
DVD.  
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the  
One Touch Copy feature. This copies the  
currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD  
title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on  
page 80 for detailed instructions.  
therefore not possible to copy a locked title  
that is copy-once protected).  
For more sophisticated copying tasks you  
can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and  
edit titles so that you only copy the bits you  
want. See Using Copy Lists on page 81 for  
detailed instructions.  
You can identify copy-once protected  
material during playback by displaying disc  
information on-screen. If the current title is  
copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown.  
Where possible, the recorder will copy your  
recordings at high-speed. Depending on the  
recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and  
various other factors, copying can be as fast  
as one minute per hour of video. See  
Minimum copying times on page 119 for  
more on copying times.  
Copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only  
for lawful copying and you are advised to  
check carefully what is lawful copying in the  
country in which you are making a copy.  
Copying of copyright material such as films  
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a  
legal exception or consented to by the  
rightowners.  
If you want to save disc space you can copy  
video at a lower recording quality (for  
example, an XP recording on the HDD  
copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way  
is always done in real-time.  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW,  
the chapter markers in the original material  
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into  
the copy at intervals, according to the Auto  
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter  
(Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on  
page 112).  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09  
Copying and backup  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy,  
the space available for recording does  
not return to the pre-copy figure.  
One Touch Copy  
* See also Copyright above.  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the  
currently playing or selected (in the Disc  
Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to  
HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start the copy.  
Notes on copying using One Touch  
Copy  
Copying to DVD  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as  
thumbnail picture markers for the Disc  
Navigator, are also copied. However, if  
you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or  
DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40  
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same  
recording mode. When copying DVD to  
HDD, the copy is made in whatever  
recording mode is currently set.  
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is  
loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.  
characters of a name are copied.  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not  
be in exactly the same positions as the  
original when recording on to a Video  
mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW.  
REC MODE  
1
If you’re copying from DVD to  
the HDD, select a recording mode.  
Note that selecting a recording mode higher  
than the title playing will not result in a better  
quality recording.  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy  
function to copy a title if any part of the  
title is copy-once protected.  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios  
can’t be copied to a Video mode disc.  
Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM  
disc for this type of material.  
2
Press during playback to copy  
the current title.  
The front panel display indicates that the title  
is being copied.  
1
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes )  
widescreen material can’t be copied to a  
Video mode disc. Use a VR mode  
DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this  
type of material.  
• High-speed copying is used when  
copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback  
continues while copying.  
• Real-time copying is used when copying  
from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts  
from the beginning of the title.  
• When HDD Recording Format is set to  
Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/  
MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high-  
speed copied to a Video mode disc.  
Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or  
DVD-RAM.  
Canceling One Touch Copy  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s  
started.  
• Recordings of dual mono/bilingual  
broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied  
to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR  
mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM.  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
Press and hold for more than a  
second.  
Copying is canceled and the video already  
copied is erased.  
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to  
single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using  
One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs  
for titles over 8 hours.  
Note  
80  
En  
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP  
or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/  
+RW using One Touch Copy.  
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line  
System setting is changed (see  
Additional information about the TV  
system settings on page 116).  
Copying to the HDD  
• Resetting the recorder to its factory  
settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 133) will erase the Copy List.  
• The maximum title length for copying is  
12 hours.  
• Title name and chapter markers are also  
copied, except when copying from a  
finalized Video mode disc.  
1
Load a recordable DVD.  
• It is possible to complete the following  
steps without having a recordable DVD  
loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD  
loaded); however, the steps are slightly  
different.  
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter  
markers for the Disc Navigator are  
copied, but their position in the copy  
may be slightly changed from the  
original.  
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode)  
disc for the copy, make sure it is  
initialized before you start.  
• If some part of the title being copied is  
copy-protected, copying will start, but  
the copy-protected portions will not be  
copied.  
HOME  
MENU  
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
Menu.  
Using Copy Lists  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘HDD DVD’.  
* See also Copyright on page 79.  
If this is the first time to create a Copy List,  
skip to step 5 below.  
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of  
HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.  
When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can,  
however, edit the titles in your copy list,  
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-  
naming titles, for example. Edits you make to  
titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual  
video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the  
Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify  
anything in your Copy List safe in the  
knowledge that the actual content is not  
being altered.  
HDD DVD  
DVD/CD HDD  
Disc Back-up  
4
If there is already a Copy List stored  
in the recorder, choose whether to  
‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue  
Using Previous Copy List’.  
Copying from HDD to DVD  
Continue Using Previous Copy List  
Create New Copy List  
Important  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
• If you select Continue Using Previous  
Copy List, skip to step 10 below.  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List  
at a time.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will  
erase any Copy List already stored in the  
recorder.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09  
Copying and backup  
6
Press to display the command  
ENTER  
menu panel.  
5
Add titles to the Copy List  
The Command Menu panel  
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).  
10 Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
10 Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
1 > 2 > 3  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Back  
Back  
Next  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Next  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Free  
1
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Free  
1
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
0.0G  
4.3G  
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are  
highlighted in pink.  
Edit screen.  
There are some restrictions on titles that can  
be added to the Copy List if you are copying  
to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW:  
3
Title  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
11/29Wed7:00PM2ch SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Edit Title  
1
2
3
Back  
• When adding titles that contain copy-  
once protected material, the copy-once  
parts will not be added.  
Next  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
• When adding titles that contain material  
of more than one aspect ratio (screen  
size), each part with a different aspect  
ratio will be added as a separate title if  
high-speed copying is possible.  
Copy List Total  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Current DVD Remain  
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the  
ꢀ/ꢁ buttons, then press ENTER.  
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying  
may not be possible to a Video mode disc.  
Copy  
Edit Title  
3
Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
1
2
3
11/29Wed7:00PM2c
Erase  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2c
Title Name  
Back  
Next  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2c
Erase Section  
Move  
Preview  
Cancel  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
A menu of editing commands appears:  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the  
Copy List (see Erase on page 70).  
Note  
1 • Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8  
(Video Mode On).  
LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.  
• Dual mono/Bilingual recordings.  
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
Title Name – Name or rename a title in  
the Copy List (see Title Name on  
page 70).  
ENTER  
10  
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.  
Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see  
Erase Section on page 72).  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
1
2
3
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Move – Change the order of titles in the  
Copy List (see Move on page 76).  
Back  
Preview – Check the content of a title in  
Next  
the Copy List.  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List  
into two (see Divide on page 73).  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Combine – Combine two titles in the  
Copy List into one (see Combine on  
page 76).  
There are several options available from the  
next screen:  
Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a  
Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on  
page 74):  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/  
Change the chapter order.  
Combine – Combine two chapters  
into one.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to  
change the recording quality (see  
1
Recording Mode on page 85).  
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to  
change the disc name. Input a name of  
up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or  
40 characters for a Video mode disc or  
DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is  
similar to that of naming titles; see Title  
Name on page 70.)  
Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail  
frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on  
page 72).  
• Select Finalize if you want to  
Recording Mode – Set the picture  
quality of the copy (see Recording Mode  
on page 85).  
automatically finalize a Video mode DVD  
2
or DVD+R after copying. Select a title  
menu style from the following screen.  
Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual – Set how  
dual mono/bilingual audio should be  
copied when copying from HDD to Video  
mode DVD (see Dual Mono Audio/  
Bilingual on page 85).  
ENTER  
11  
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start  
copying.  
Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video Mode)  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have  
that need editing.  
1 > 2 > 3  
Start Copy  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
Video Mode  
Return  
Recording Mode  
Input Disc Name  
Finalize  
Copy Time 0h 16m  
Recording Mode  
Disc Name  
High-Speed  
Off  
Finalize  
Start Copy  
9
Display the command menu  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
panel.  
Note  
1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy.  
2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09  
Copying and backup  
Copying from DVD to HDD  
Important  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Next’ from the  
command menu panel to proceed to the  
title edit screen.  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t  
accessible when a finalized Video mode  
disc or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as  
the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you  
can still use the One Touch Copy  
function, however (See One Touch Copy  
on page 80).  
ENTER  
6
Select a title to edit.  
A menu appears of Copy List editing  
commands:  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the  
Copy List (see Erase on page 70).  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List  
at a time.  
Move – Change the order of titles in the  
Copy List (see Move on page 76).  
• The Copy List will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are  
erased or edited.  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Play List  
and Original.  
Preview – Check the content of a title in  
the Copy List.  
Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have  
that need editing.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or  
finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory  
settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 133).  
ENTER  
7
Select ‘Next’ from the  
command menu panel to proceed to the  
copy options screen.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to  
change the recording quality (see  
Recording Mode on page 85).  
• It may not be possible to copy from a  
DVD disc that was recorded on a  
different DVD recorder or a PC.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
ENTER  
Menu.  
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start  
copying.  
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.  
ENTER  
Select a Copy List type.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will  
erase any Copy List already stored in the  
recorder.  
ENTER  
4
Add titles to the Copy List  
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are  
highlighted in pink.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
Recording Mode  
Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from  
1
Select the title containing the  
the command menu panel.  
audio you want to change.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select a recording mode for  
2
Select ‘Dual Mono Audio/  
the copy.  
Bilingual’ from the command menu  
panel.  
1
High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is  
copied at the same recording quality as  
the original.  
ENTER  
3
Select a dual mono/bilingual  
2
XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy  
audio option.  
List is copied at the specified recording  
quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy  
at a higher quality setting than the  
original, the copy will not be better  
quality than the original.)  
If you select MN above, you can also  
change the level setting (MN1 to MN32  
3
or LPCM) from the Recording Quality box  
that appears.  
2,4  
Optimized – The recording quality is  
automatically adjusted so that the Copy  
List fits on to the space available on the  
disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.  
When you change the recording mode  
setting, you can see how much disc space it  
will require. If this is more than is available,  
it shows up in red and you won’t be able to  
start copying. In this case, either change the  
recording quality, or press RETURN to go  
back to the Copy List screen and erase one  
or more titles from the Copy List.  
Note  
1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly  
the same position as the original.  
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or  
DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at  
regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 112).  
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.  
4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09  
Copying and backup  
Using disc backup  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
* See also Copyright on page 79.  
Disc Back-up  
This feature offers a simple way to make a  
backup copy of a finalized Video mode disc  
or DVD+R/+RW. The data is copied first to  
the hard disk drive , then on to another  
recordable DVD disc.  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
1
Cancel  
Start  
HOME  
MENU  
• To see the progress of the backup, press  
DISPLAY.  
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’  
• You can cancel the backup process by  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second.  
from the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
5
When the data has been copied, take  
2
Select a backup option.  
out the disc and load a blank* recordable  
DVD.  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the  
disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the  
previous contents of the disc will be erased in  
the backup process.  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing data  
Erase back-up data  
Disc Back-up  
There are three backup options:  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc  
Start new disc back-up – Start making  
a backup of a disc.  
Cancel  
Start  
Resume writing data – Record the  
backup data already on the HDD to a  
recordable DVD.  
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or  
DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the  
backup.  
Erase back-up data – Erase the backup  
data on the HDD.  
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW,  
you cannot undo the finalization later.  
3
Load the disc you want to make a  
backup of.  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary  
so there may be cases where the  
contents of the disc you’re backing-up  
will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of  
disc.  
You can only make backup copies of  
finalized Video mode discs, finalized DVD+R  
or DVD+RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/  
DVD+R DL discs).  
Disc Back-up  
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up  
to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW  
discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/  
+RW discs.  
No disc.  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
Cancel  
Start  
Note  
86  
En  
1 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the  
• If you decide to leave the backup data on  
the HDD, you can make backup copies  
to recordable DVD discs anytime from  
the Disc Back-up menu.  
backed-up data to the blank disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Cancel  
Start  
• To see the progress of the backup, press  
DISPLAY.  
• You can cancel the backup process by  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second. However, this will  
make the disc unusable (although if you  
are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc  
you can re-initialize it in order to make it  
usable again—see Initializing recordable  
DVD discs on page 50.)  
7
After the recorder has finished  
recording the backup disc, you can select  
whether to make another backup of the  
same data or exit.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc back-up finished.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
Cancel  
Start  
• Select Start to make another backup  
copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to  
make another backup copy, return to  
step 6 above.  
8
If you don’t need to keep the backup  
data on the HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD;  
select No to keep it (you can delete it later if  
you want to).  
Disc Back-up  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
No  
Yes  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Using the Jukebox  
Chapter 10  
Using the Jukebox  
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the  
recorder’s HDD to store and playback music  
from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also  
transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-  
RW/-ROM or a USB device. Once on the  
HDD, you can name albums, assign them a  
genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to  
play to Jump.  
1
Load the CD you want to copy to the  
HDD.  
HOME  
MENU  
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
Menu.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘DVD/CD  
HDD’.  
Copying music to the HDD  
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the  
CD are copied to the HDD.  
The first step is to copy some music to the  
HDD. CD audio is copied in real-time, while  
WMA and MP3 files are copied at high  
speed. All tracks are copied from each CD  
as an album.  
• You can also start copying by starting  
playback of the CD (including program  
play) and then pressing ONE TOUCH  
COPY.  
1
• To cancel copying an audio CD, press  
and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second.  
WMA/MP3 album and track names are  
copied along with the audio. CD album and  
track names are not copied, but you can add  
these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on  
page 90).  
• To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc,  
press ENTER.  
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio  
tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part  
currently selected will play.  
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in  
the order they appear on the CD. When  
copying CD audio, you can copy them in  
some other order using the program play  
mode. See Program play on page 60 for how  
to do this.  
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio  
tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD  
disc.  
Important  
• While copying CD audio, no other  
recorder operation is possible.  
• When copying CD audio, scheduled  
timer recordings will not start until  
copying is complete.  
• Copy protected CDs may not copy  
successfully.  
Note  
1 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps  
Dolby Digital.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit –  
Listen to WMA or MP3 files that have  
been stored on the HDD.  
Copying files from a USB  
device to the HDD  
Listen to Music from USB Device –  
Listen to music from an external USB  
device.  
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a  
connected USB device, such as a USB drive,  
to the HDD.  
1
Connect the USB device.  
ENTER  
3
Select what you want to play.  
HOME  
MENU  
The screen below shows CD albums stored  
on the HDD:  
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Menu.  
3
Album name  
ENTER  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
Select ‘Listen to Music from  
3
4
Album1  
Album2  
ALL  
1
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
USB Device’.  
By number  
5
6
7
8
9
Album3  
Album4  
Album5  
Album6  
Album7  
2
3
Play Mode  
4
All Genres  
5
ENTER  
Genre Name  
6
4
Select ‘Copy Album’ from the  
7
10 Album8  
command menu panel.  
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup  
HDD  
1-10  
0.03.58  
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep  
Total 12 1.14.58  
classical  
Remain  
60h30m  
ENTER  
Info for selected album  
Playback status  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
• If you select a whole album to play, all  
tracks that are not set to Jump will play.  
The selected folder on the USB device will be  
copied to the HDD.  
• If you want to start playback from a  
selected track in an album, or play a  
track that is set to Jump, press to  
enter the track list then select a track to  
play.  
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB  
device are copyable/displayable.  
Playing music from the  
Jukebox  
• Press  
SUBTITLE or  
ANGLE to  
change the page.  
You can select albums or individual tracks  
1
from the Jukebox to play.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select a Jukebox option.  
Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs  
that have been copied to the HDD.  
Note  
89  
En  
1 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Using the Jukebox  
Changing the album view  
Editing Jukebox albums  
A number of commands are available for  
editing and changing the playback  
behaviour of albums.  
1
From the album list, display  
the view options menu panel.  
HOME  
MENU  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
2
Select a view option.  
Menu.  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
ENTER  
ALL  
1
Play  
Sort
By number m2  
Erase  
Edit  
By
2
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’ or  
By favorite  
m3  
m4  
m5  
m6  
m7  
m8  
2
By album  
Genr
3
Play Mode  
‘Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit’.  
4
A
Cancel  
5
Genre Name  
6
7
ENTER  
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup  
HDD  
1-10  
0.03.58  
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep  
Total 12 1.14.58  
classical  
3
Select what you want to edit.  
Remain  
60h30m  
ENTER  
Sort order  
4
Select an edit function from  
By number – Albums are listed by the  
album number.  
the command menu panel.  
Erase – Erase the selected track (if all  
tracks in an album are selected, the  
whole album is erased).  
By favorite – Most often listened to  
music appears at the top of the list.  
By album – Albums are listed  
alphabetically.  
Edit > Edit Title – Enter a name of up to  
64 characters for the album. See page  
Title Name on page 70 for how to enter  
names.  
Genre  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the  
genre for the album.  
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
ALL  
1
Sort
All Genres m2  
By
No Category  
m3  
m4  
m5  
m6  
m7  
m8  
2
1
Best  
Rock  
Pop  
Edit > Jump Set – Set a track to jump  
Genr
3
Play Mode  
4
A
so that it doesn't play (choose this  
command again to cancel the Jump  
setting).  
Jazz  
5
Genre Name  
Classical  
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup  
HDD  
1-10  
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep  
Total 12 1.14.58  
classical  
0.03.58  
Play Mode – Change the playback order  
Remain  
60h30m  
for albums and tracks.  
All Genres – All albums are displayed.  
Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12  
characters for a genre. See page Title  
Name on page 70 for how to enter  
names.  
Genre – Only albums in the selected  
genre are displayed.  
Note  
90  
En  
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
Chapter 11  
The PhotoViewer  
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG  
photos and picture files stored on the HDD,  
recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a  
Copy photos from a USB device – Copy  
all photos on a connected USB device to  
the HDD.  
1
USB-equipped digital camera. You can also  
import files and save them to the recorder’s  
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.  
ENTER  
3
Select the folder containing  
the files you want to view, copy or edit.  
Important  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
Currently selected File information  
thumbnail  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
PhotoViewer  
HDD  
File  
Chair No.  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Locating JPEG picture files  
4
7
HOME  
MENU  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the  
Home Menu.  
Pages in  
folder list  
Incompatible/  
unknown file  
Pages in  
file view  
ENTER  
2
Select the location of the files  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,  
check that the disc and file formats are  
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG  
file compatibility on page 11 and PC-  
created disc compatibility on page 12).  
you want to view or edit.  
View/Edit photos on the HDD  
View photos on  
a
CD/DVD  
View photos on  
a
USB device  
a USB device  
Copy photos from  
View/Edit photos on the HDD – View  
or edit photos already stored on the  
recorder’s HDD.  
View photos on a CD/DVD – View  
photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-  
R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.  
View photos on a USB device – View  
photos on a digital camera (or other USB  
device) connected to the USB port.  
Note  
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected  
USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function ( see Reloading files from a disc or USB  
device on page 92).  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
The PhotoViewer  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some  
pictures may be displayed with black  
bars top and bottom, or left and right.  
Playing a slideshow  
• Large picture files may take a few  
seconds to display. This is normal.  
ENTER  
1
list.  
Select a folder from the folder  
• During playback of the slideshow you  
can listen to WMA/MP3 files in the  
Slideshow genre (see Editing Jukebox  
albums on page 90).  
The first nine images from the selected  
folder are displayed as thumbnails in the  
main part of the screen.  
STOP  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes  
the recorder to load the file.  
5
Press to return to the thumbnail  
view area.  
• You can also use the RETURN button.  
• To start the slideshow from the first file in  
the folder, skip to step 4 after pressing  
ENTER.  
RETURN  
6
Press to return to the folder view  
ENTER  
area.  
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the  
• Withtheleftmostthumbnailhighlighted,  
you can use the button.  
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME  
MENU.  
menu.  
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.  
• You can also select a folder, then press  
to get to the thumbnail view area.  
• To get back to the folder list, press  
RETURN (or when the leftmost  
thumbnail is highlighted).  
Reloading files from a disc or USB  
device  
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files  
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the  
images using the reload function.  
3
4
Select a thumbnail.  
• Use the PREV and NEXT  
buttons to display the previous/next  
page of thumbnails.  
1
Navigate to the last entry in  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999  
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ from  
files/99 folders from the disc or  
connected USB device.  
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes)  
the menu.  
• You can also select a file or folder then  
press PLAY to start playing the  
slideshow.  
1
to load in the images.  
• Use PREV / NEXT to display the  
previous/next picture, or PAUSE to  
pause the slideshow.  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter  
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.)  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 94.  
Zooming an image  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to  
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of  
two or four. You can also move the area of  
the picture displayed.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the  
ENTER  
1
Press during the slideshow to  
menu.  
zoom the picture.  
3
Select a file to import, then press  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,  
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is  
displayed on-screen.  
ENTER  
.
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 94.  
2
Use to move the zoomed  
ENTER  
area.  
4
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the  
menu.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a  
slideshow so you can always view pictures  
the right way up, whichever way they were  
taken.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
CD/DVD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
Copy all to HDD  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Copy to HDD  
4
7
ANGLE  
Print  
Multi-Mode  
Press during the slideshow to  
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by  
90º.  
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
picture in increments of 90º.  
ENTER  
Importing files to the HDD  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and  
copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to  
cancel.  
You can import files and save them on to the  
1
• The files will be copied to the HDD with  
the same folder structure as the original.  
HDD from a CD, DVD or a connected USB  
camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and  
organize your pictures and print them out if  
you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible  
printer.  
• Importing to the HDD will not work if  
there is insufficient space on the HDD,  
or if there are already the maximum  
number of files and/or folders on the  
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).  
ENTER  
1
Select the location of folders/  
files you want to import.  
To import a whole folder, press ENTER here  
and skip to step 4 below.  
Note  
93  
En  
1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
The PhotoViewer  
Selecting multiple files or folders  
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple  
folders/files at once for importing or editing.  
ENTER  
5
Select the command you want  
to apply to all the selected items.  
ENTER  
Importing files from a USB  
device  
1
Select the folder containing  
the files you want to import.  
Use this feature to copy all the files on a  
connected USB device to this recorder’s  
HDD.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the  
menu.  
PhotoViewer  
12/13 WED  
HDD  
Important  
Folder  
• After backing up the pictures on your  
USB device to HDD, we recommend  
verifying that they have been recorded  
properly before deleting anything from  
the camera.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
File selection  
001. 12/12 TUE  
Start Slideshow  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
New Folder  
Folder Options  
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
Cancel  
Use [][] to select, then press [] to  
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.  
1/2  
1/3  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Copy photos from a  
USB device’ from the main PhotoViewer  
menu.  
ENTER  
3
To add a file/folder to the list,  
select it, then choose ‘Select’ from the  
menu.  
ENTER  
A checkbox mark () is shown by the item  
you selected.  
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
• While the files are being imported, any  
timer programs set to start will not  
begin, and no other operation is  
possible.  
• You can also select a file or folder and  
press STOP to add it to the list.  
• To remove a file/folder from the list,  
select Cancel Selection from the menu.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
Multi-Mode  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
4
7
Press STOP or ENTER to display the menu  
and cancel selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
ENTER  
4
Display the command menu.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
Copying selected files to a  
DVD-R/-RW  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
menu.  
This feature allows you just to copy some of  
the files stored on HDD to a DVD.  
ENTER  
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on  
the disc as a Video mode title, making it  
possible to view the photos on other DVD  
players/recorders that may not be  
compatible with JPEG file playback. Note  
however that you may need to finalize the  
disc before it will play on another DVD player  
(copying selected files doesn’t automatically  
finalize the disc).  
5
to cancel.  
• Folder names on the disc will be  
number PIONR. File names will be  
PHOT number.  
• Note that during copying, any timer  
programs set to start will not begin, and  
no other operation is possible.  
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can  
press ENTER to cancel.  
Important  
• A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded.  
Editing files on the HDD  
• Slideshows can contain up to 99 files. If  
there are more files than this in the  
slideshow, multiple slideshows are  
created on the disc.  
There are a number of commands you can  
use to edit and organize your pictures stored  
on the HDD.  
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD  
the slideshow will become unplayable  
but the free space will not increase.  
Creating a new folder  
ENTER  
1
From the folder list, display the  
1
Load a blank (or unfinalized Video  
menu.  
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘New Folder’.  
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on  
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder  
list with the name F_number.  
the HDD’ from the menu.  
ENTER  
PhotoViewer  
12/13 WED  
HDD  
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
Folder  
you want to copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files  
1
4
7
2
5
8
File selection  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Start Slideshow  
New Folder  
contained in it.  
Folder Options  
Copy to DVD  
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 94.  
Multi-Mode  
Cancel  
Use [][] to select, then press [] to  
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.  
1/2  
1/3  
• There can be up to 999 folders on the  
HDD.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
The PhotoViewer  
• You can also erase a file or folder by  
pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is  
highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.  
Erasing a file or folder  
ENTER  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
Copying files  
you want to erase.  
• To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 94.  
ENTER  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
you want to copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files  
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files  
contained in it. Please be careful!  
contained in it.  
• You can’t erase files that have been  
locked.  
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 94.  
• Folders containing locked files can’t be  
erased. Unlocked files in the folder,  
however, will be erased.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder  
ENTER  
Options’.  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Options’.  
ENTER  
3
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
Contents’.  
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
File Options  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
Print  
4
7
Copy to DVD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
Multi-Mode  
1
2
5
8
Sat Slieso
Erase  
Copy  
Rename Fil  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Cancel  
4
7
e
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
Lock  
Cancel  
ENTER  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
3
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
ENTER  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
4
Select a folder to copy the  
1
2
5
8
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
t Sldh
Erase  
Copy  
folder(s)/file(s) to.  
4
7
Rename File  
Lock  
ENTER  
Cancel  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
to cancel.  
1/2  
1/3  
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there  
is insufficient space on the HDD; if there  
are already the maximum number of  
files and/or folders on the HDD.  
ENTER  
4
to cancel.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
Naming files and folders  
Locking/Unlocking files  
Locking files will protect them from  
accidental erasure and prevent them from  
being renamed.  
1
Select the file or folder you want to  
rename.  
You can’t rename files that have been  
locked.  
Use the same process to both lock and  
unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the  
PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Options’.  
3
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename  
ENTER  
1
Select the file(s) you want to  
Folder’.  
lock (or unlock).  
• To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the  
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files  
or folders on page 94.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Erase  
Copy  
Rename Fil  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
4
7
e
Lock  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder  
Cancel  
Options’.  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
ENTER  
4
Enter a new name for the file/folder.  
Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64  
characters long.  
3
Contents’.  
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input  
a name on page 71 for how to enter a name.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Sat Slieso
Erase  
Copy  
Rename Fil  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
4
7
e
Lock  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon  
next to them.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
The PhotoViewer  
Printing files  
Tip  
• Paper size and layout can be set; the  
options available depend on your  
printer—check the printer manual for  
details.  
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer  
to the USB port will enable you to print out  
picture files stored on the HDD, or directly  
1
from a digital camera.  
• If the message Searching for printer.  
Please wait a moment continues to be  
displayed, try disconnecting then  
reconnecting the USB cable.  
Make sure that the printer (and your digital  
camera if you are using that as a source) is  
connected to the recorder before starting.  
• This recorder may not work correctly  
with all printers.  
ENTER  
1
Select the file(s) you want to  
print.  
• To print multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 94.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
1/24/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
File Options  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Print  
4
7
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
It takes a moment for the recorder to  
communicate with the printer. During this  
time you can press ENTER to cancel the  
print.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or  
‘Cancel’ to cancel.  
• Once printing has started, you can  
cancel by pressing ENTER.  
Note  
98  
En  
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
12  
Chapter 12  
The Disc Setup menu  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name  
discs, lock the contents to prevent  
• See Title Name on page 70 for more on  
navigating the input screen.  
accidental recording and erasure, initialize  
and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu:  
Lock Disc  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Basic settings  
• Default setting: Off  
Locking the disc will prevent accidental  
recording, editing or erasing of the disc.  
Input Disc Name  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
Important  
• A locked disc can still be initialized  
(which will completely erase the disc).  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the  
recorder automatically assigns a name for  
the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You  
can use the Input Disc Name function to  
change the default disc name to something  
more descriptive. This name appears when  
you load the disc and when you display disc  
information on-screen.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock disc’ then  
HOME  
MENU  
‘On’ or ‘Off’.  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
Disc Setup  
On  
Off  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Initialize  
Finalize  
ENTER  
Optimize HDD  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc  
Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.  
Disc Setup  
Input Disc Name  
Basic  
Next Screen  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording,  
editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you  
need to unlock the disc to make edits, select  
Off.  
Initialize  
Lock Disc  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the disc.  
The disc name can be up to 64 characters  
long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video  
mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
The Disc Setup menu  
Initialize settings  
Undo Finalize  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW  
discs recorded on this recorder in Video  
mode. You need to do this if you want to  
record more material or edit material already  
on the disc.  
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW  
disc for either VR mode or Video mode  
recording.  
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc,  
it will be automatically initialized for  
recording according to the DVD-RW Auto  
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 112).  
You can also undo the finalization of VR  
mode discs which have been finalized on  
other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc  
the message This disc cannot be recorded.  
Undo the finalization is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc  
using this recorder.  
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recording when you load them, but it is also  
possible to initialize them for VR mode  
1
HOME  
MENU  
recording.  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be  
initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.  
When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR  
mode.  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 50 for detailed instructions.  
2
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo  
Finalize’ then ‘Start’.  
Finalize settings  
Finalize  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so  
that the disc can be played on a regular DVD  
player or computer equipped with a suitable  
DVD-ROM drive.  
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.  
This is only necessary if you want to a player  
to display a title menu for the disc.  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players on page 48 for detailed instructions.  
Note  
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also,  
once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
12  
Optimize HDD  
Initialize HDD  
HDD  
HDD  
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the  
HDD file system gradually becomes  
fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need  
optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented  
files.  
When your DVD recorder is working without  
a problem this option is not visible in the  
Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file  
system becomes corrupted for some reason,  
you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem.  
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all  
the data on it.  
When the HDD needs optimizing the  
recorder will automatically display a  
message recommending optimization.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Important  
Home Menu.  
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as  
eight hours. During optimization,  
ENTER  
playback and recording are not possible.  
2
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then  
• Canceling optimization mid-way does  
not undo the optimization already done,  
so the HDD will be partly optimized.  
‘Start’.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Initialize HDD  
HOME  
MENU  
Initialize  
Finalize  
InitializeHDD
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then  
‘Start’.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Optimize HDD  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
A progress bar indicates how long there is  
left to go.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
The Video Adjust menu  
Chapter 13  
The Video Adjust menu  
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up  
the picture quality for the built-in tuner and  
external inputs, for disc playback, and for  
recording.  
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch  
between the built-in TV tuner and the  
external inputs (not possible if you  
selected DV Video Setting in step 2  
(above)).  
• Use the PREV / NEXT buttons  
to change the channel of the built-in TV  
tuner.  
Setting the picture quality  
for TV and external inputs  
There are six presets available:  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of  
picture quality settings for the built-in TV  
tuner and for each external input. There are  
several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your  
own sets.  
Tuner – suitable for general TV  
broadcasts  
VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
DTV/LDP – suitable for digital  
broadcasts and Laserdiscs  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
Important  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR  
or DTV/LDP).  
Choosing a preset  
HOME  
MENU  
1
With the recorder stopped, press  
to display the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Select the DV input by selecting DV then DV  
Video Setting from the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
3
Select a preset.  
7ch  
Tuner  
Detailed Settings  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
13  
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)  
component.  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you  
can save your own set of picture quality  
settings.  
White AGC – Turn on for automatic  
1
white level adjustment.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and  
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,  
2 or 3).  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
white.  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
black.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard  
reference black level (NTSC video input  
only).  
7ch  
Memory1  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between  
Detailed Settings  
red and green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the  
colors appear.  
ENTER  
3
Select the setting you want to  
adjust.  
ENTER  
4
Adjust the currently selected  
Memory1  
7ch  
setting.  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
3-D Y/C  
Motion  
Still  
HOME  
MENU  
Auto  
Off  
Motion  
Off  
Still  
Max  
Max  
5
Press to exit.  
YNR  
You can now use the preset for any other  
input or the built-in TV tuner.  
CNR  
Off  
White AGC  
White Level  
Min  
Max  
Tip  
You can adjust the following settings:  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust  
different settings, press ENTER after  
selecting the setting you want to adjust.  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and  
still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive.  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the  
picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set  
to Auto, but try switching to Off if the  
picture appears unnatural.  
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness /  
colour separation (NTSC video input  
only).  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
Note  
103  
En  
1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
The Video Adjust menu  
Creating your own set  
Setting the picture quality  
for disc playback  
There are three user presets in which you  
can save your own set of picture quality  
settings for disc playback.  
This setting determines how the picture will  
look when playing discs.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and  
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,  
2 or 3).  
Choosing a preset  
2
Move the cursor down and select  
HOME  
MENU  
‘Detailed Settings’.  
1
With a disc playing (or paused),  
press to display the Home Menu.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Select a setting.  
3
Select the picture quality setting you  
want to adjust.  
ENTER  
Memory1  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
Subtitle Adjust  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
On  
TV  
Detailed Settings  
Off  
Off  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
CNR  
There are six presets available:  
BNR  
Off  
MNR  
Min  
TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray  
tube TVs  
PDP – suitable for plasma display  
You can adjust the following settings:  
screens  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and  
still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is  
Professional – suitable for professional  
monitors  
ineffective when PureCinema is On.)  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the  
picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set  
to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2,  
On or Off if the picture appears  
unnatural.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or  
Professional).  
• Subtitle Adjust – When the video  
output is set to progressive scan, it’s  
possible that the subtitles in some  
movies will disappear unnaturally. In this  
case select the On setting (only possible  
when connected using HDMI).  
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
13  
CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)  
component (only possible when  
connected using HDMI).  
Tip  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust  
different settings, press ENTER after  
selecting the setting you want to adjust.  
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the block noise  
(artefacts visible in areas of flat color,  
caused by MPEG compression).  
• YNR and Detail are ineffective for analog  
and component video when the Video  
Priority Mode is set to HDMI. Set to  
Component to make effective for both  
analog and HDMI video. See page 115.  
MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito  
noise (artefacts visible around the edges  
of an image, caused by MPEG  
compression).  
Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of  
the high-frequency (detailed) elements  
in the picture.  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges  
appear.  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
white.  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
black.  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard  
reference black level (NTSC video  
playback on the Interlace video output  
setting only). (Black Setup is ineffective  
for HDMI output.)  
Gamma Correction – Adjusts the  
brightness of darker images.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between  
red and green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the  
colours appear.  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the  
currently selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you  
want them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Chapter 14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture,  
language and so on.  
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and  
recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of  
inactivity.  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and  
the clock will be set automatically.  
Manual •  
Display  
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal  
in your area, you can set the time and date manually.  
Set preferences for time and date display format.  
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.  
Input Line System  
525 System  
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external  
input.  
625 System  
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.  
Taiwan and Philippines model: Default setting is 525 System. Other: Default setting is 625 System.  
See also About the input line system on page 116 for more information on this setting.  
Power Save  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
On  
No antenna input signals are passed through to the  
outputs when the recorder is in standby.  
Off •  
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving  
at the antenna inputs are passed along to the  
outputs.  
HELP Setting  
On •  
Off  
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI dis-  
plays.  
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI dis-  
plays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually display  
the Help screen.)  
Setup Navigator  
Start  
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switch-  
ing on and setting up on page 28.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Tuner  
Options  
Explanation  
Auto Channel  
Setting  
(Taiwan and  
Antenna •  
Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It  
takes a few moments for the auto tuning to com-  
plete.  
Philippines model)  
Cable  
Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few  
moments for the auto tuning to complete.  
Auto Channel  
Setting  
(Other)  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen, select your country, then  
wait for automatic tuning to complete. The channel  
mapping screen should appear when the recorder is  
set up. Press ENTER to exit this screen.  
Manual CH Setting Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any  
of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your  
country, then proceed to the manual channel setting  
screen:  
• Change channel presets using the PREV /  
NEXT buttons.  
To skip the displayed channel (because there is no  
station assigned to that channel), change the Skip  
setting to On.  
• Set the CH System setting to match the channel  
system of your country or region (except Taiwan and  
Philippines model).  
• Set the Channel setting to the channel you want to  
assign to the current channel preset (except Taiwan  
and Philippines model).  
To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT  
setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.  
Set the Sound System setting to match the  
sound system of your region (except Taiwan and  
Philippines model).  
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to  
five characters for the current channel preset (except  
Taiwan and Philippines model).  
Channel Swapping Next Screen  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel  
assignments of different presets so that you can  
group together presets that naturally go together.  
Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.  
G-Code CH Setting Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to assign channel  
numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in  
your TV guide to see which channel numbers should  
be assigned to which guide channels. Press ENTER  
when your done to leave this screen.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Video In/Out Settings  
Input Colour  
System  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour  
system for the external input and the built-in TV  
tuner. Use the CH +/– buttons to change the preset.  
On the default Auto setting the recorder can gener-  
ally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL,  
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you  
may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed  
incorrectly.  
See also About the input color system on page 117 for more information on this setting.  
Component Video Interlace •  
Out  
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with pro-  
gressive-scan video.  
Progressive  
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compat-  
ible. Check the operating instructions that came with  
your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.  
If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any  
picture at all. In this case, press (PLAY) while holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to  
switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 114 to the default setting).  
When an HDMI device is connected and Video Priority Mode is set to HDMI, the Component Video Out setting is  
automatically set to Interlace.  
NTSC on PAL TV  
On  
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.  
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.  
Off •  
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating  
instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 117 for related information.  
Audio In  
NICAM Select  
NICAM •  
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Regular Audio  
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
(You can still switch the audio to record using the  
AUDIO button before recording.)  
Tuner Level  
Normal •  
Standard setting.  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Compression  
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is exces-  
sive, causing distortion.  
External Audio  
Stereo •  
Select if the audio from the currently selected exter-  
nal input is standard stereo.  
Dual Mono/  
Bilingual  
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.  
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder  
whether the audio is stereo or dual mono/bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
L •  
Explanation  
Dual Mono  
Recording  
(Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Select to record the left channel of an external dual  
mono source when recording to DVD in Video  
mode,to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to  
Video Mode On, or in LPCM mode.  
R
As above, but for right channel recording.  
When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording  
Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the  
one you want on playback.  
Bilingual Recording A/L •  
(Other)  
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source  
when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in  
LPCM mode, from an external source.  
B/R  
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.  
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you  
want on playback.  
DV Input  
Stereo 1 •  
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during  
the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two  
stereo audio tracks.  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a  
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the  
two stereo audio tracks.  
Audio Out  
Dolby Digital Out  
Dolby Digital •  
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital  
source is being played.  
Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output.  
PCM  
On •  
Off  
Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a  
Dolby Digital decoder.  
DTS Out  
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being  
played.  
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is  
being played. Use when your connected equipment  
doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the  
analog audio outputs.  
96 kHz PCM Out  
96 kHz48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz out-  
put. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t sup-  
port 96 kHz sampling rate.  
96 kHz  
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is  
being played.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
MPEG  
Explanation  
MPEG Out  
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using  
MPEG audio is being played.  
MPEG PCM •  
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM out-  
put. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have  
an MPEG audio decoder.  
Audio DRC  
On  
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control).  
Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low  
volume.  
Off •  
Switches off Audio DRC.  
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby  
Digital.  
Language  
OSD Language  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to  
Chinese.  
(Taiwan and Philip-  
pines model)  
English •  
(Other)  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to  
English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-  
screen displays.  
Audio Language  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video play-  
back to Chinese.  
(Taiwan and Philip-  
pines model)  
English •  
(Other)  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video play-  
back to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the  
default audio language for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default audio language to some-  
thing other than the ones listed. See Selecting other  
languages for language options on page 118.  
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language  
preference.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Subtitle Language  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video  
playback to Chinese.  
(Taiwan and Philip-  
pines model)  
English •  
(Other)  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video  
playback to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the  
default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default subtitle language to some-  
thing other than the ones listed. See Selecting other  
languages for language options on page 118.  
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle  
Language preference.  
Auto Language  
On •  
On this setting:  
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your  
default language will play using that language, with-  
out subtitles.  
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default  
language but that have a subtitle track in your default  
language will play the original audio track with subti-  
tles.  
Off  
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your  
audio and subtitle language preferences.  
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same  
language.  
DVD Menu  
Language  
w/Subtitle  
Language •  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same  
as that set for the subtitle language.  
English  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.  
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the  
default language for DVD-Video menus.  
Other  
Select to set the DVD menu language to something  
other than the ones listed. See Selecting other lan-  
guages for language options on page 118.  
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.  
Subtitle Display  
On •  
Select to have discs display subtitles according to  
your Subtitle Language and Auto Language prefer-  
ences.  
Off  
Select to switch off subtitle display.  
Assist Subtitle  
Select to display special additional assistive subti-  
tles, where available.  
111  
En  
Some discs may override these settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Recording  
Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to  
MN32 and LPCM modes can be set.  
Off •  
Justthestandardrecordingmodes(XP,SP,LP, EP,SLP  
and SEP) can be set.  
See also Manual recording modes on page 120 for detailed information on manual recording levels.  
Optimized Rec  
On  
The recording quality of timer recordings is automati-  
cally adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will  
not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording  
will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW),  
then the recording will start at MN1 and stop when  
all the available space is used up.  
Off •  
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the  
selected media, the recording starts but is cut off  
when no more recording is possible.  
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set.  
Set Thumbnail  
0 seconds •  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navi-  
gator to the first frame of the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into  
the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into  
the title.  
Auto Chapter  
(Video)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are  
inserted every 10 minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.  
Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers  
are inserted every 10 minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
DVD-RW Auto Init. VR Mode •  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode  
recording when loaded into the recorder for the first  
time.  
Video Mode  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode  
recording.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
HDD Recording  
Format  
Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode.  
Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the  
recording later to a Video mode DVD.  
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with  
Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if  
you want to transfer the recording to a Video mode  
DVD as high-speed copy can be used.  
• Taiwan and Philippines model: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to  
record when recording a broadcast with a SAP channel. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be  
recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 109  
• Other: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a  
bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between  
them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 109.  
Playback  
TV Screen Size  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the let-  
ter box format presentation for widescreen material.  
4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the  
pan and scan presentation for widescreen material.  
16:9 •  
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV set-  
tings determine how 4:3 material will look.  
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that  
format as some discs override this setting.  
Still Picture  
Field  
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.  
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.  
Frame  
Auto •  
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still  
image.  
Seamless Playback On  
Off •  
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the  
accuracy of the edit points.  
You may notice momentary interruption at edited  
points during playback of a VR mode Play List.  
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Parental Lock  
Set Password  
In order to change the parental lock level or change  
the country/area code, set the password using this  
option. From the following screen, enter a four-digit  
number that will be your password.  
Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your  
existing password and then a new one from the fol-  
lowing screen.  
Change Level  
From the following screen, first enter your password  
and then set a parental lock level.  
Country/Area  
Code  
From the following screen, first enter your password  
and then set a country/area code. See Country/Area  
code list on page 130.  
Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features  
the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See  
Resetting the recorder on page 133.  
Angle Indicator  
On •  
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle  
scenes on a DVD-Video disc.  
Off  
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle  
scene is showing.  
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)  
Screen Resolution  
1920 x 1080i  
1280 x 720p  
720 x 576p  
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.  
Constant 1280 x 720p output.  
Constant 720 x 576p output (for use with the 625  
input line system).  
720 x 480p  
720 x 576i  
720 x 480i  
Constant 720 x 480p output (for use with the 525  
input line system).  
Constant 720 x 576i output (for use with the 625 input  
line system).  
Constant 720 x 480i output (for use with the 525 input  
line system).  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,  
press (PLAY) while holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also  
switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the default setting).  
4:3 Video Output  
Full  
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the  
aspect ratio.  
Normal  
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change  
the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on  
each side (unless the Screen Resolution setting  
(above) is set to 720 x 480i or 720 x 576i).  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Colour  
Options  
Explanation  
RGB (0–255)  
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’  
on the RGB (16–235) setting.  
RGB (16–235)  
YCbCr 4:2:2  
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the  
black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.  
The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2  
component signal. This is the standard setting for  
HDMI-compatible devices.  
YCbCr 4:4:4  
The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4  
component signal.  
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.  
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.  
Audio Output  
Auto •  
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as  
a bitstream signal. However, depending on the  
Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and  
the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may  
be output.  
PCM  
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM  
(except DTS).  
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with  
bitstream audio.  
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.  
Video Priority Mode HDMI • Select for high quality picture output on a connected  
HDMI display. However, on this setting the YNR and  
Detail picture quality settings are not effective for  
analog video, and component video will be set to  
interlaced.  
Component  
Select if you want the YNR and Detail picture quality  
settings to be effective for both HDMI and analog  
video output, or if Component Video Out is set to  
Progressive while an HDMI display is connected  
(page 108).  
When watching video on an HDMI display, use the  
HDMI setting.  
Options  
On Screen Display On •  
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play,  
etc.) on-screen.  
Off  
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Front Panel Display On •  
The time is shown in the front panel display when the  
recorder is in standby.  
Off  
The front panel display is switched off in standby  
(although it still lights dimly when setting a timer  
recording).  
Remote Control  
Mode  
Recorder 1–3  
If you are using more than one recorder in the same  
(default: Recorder 1) room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the  
recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID,  
press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set.  
The remote will only control a recorder with the same  
ID.  
DivX VOD  
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code.  
See DivX video compatibility and DivX® VOD content  
on page 11.  
Set Preview  
(HDD only)  
Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video  
plays short excerpts from throughout the selected  
title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally  
from the beginning.)  
Normal  
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the  
title.  
Additional information about the TV system settings  
• When you switch the Input Line System  
About the input line system  
setting the Copy List is erased. If you  
switch the setting using the (STOP)  
button and OPEN/CLOSE buttons as  
described above, there is no  
This recorder is compatible with PAL,  
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems.  
The Input Line System and Input Colour  
System settings determine how the recorder  
treats incoming video signals from an  
external input or the built-in TV tuner.  
confirmation, so please use with care.  
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV  
line systems on the same disc.  
Please note the following points when  
changing the input line system:  
• When you change this setting, the Input  
Color System setting also changes  
(page 117).  
• If, when the Input Line System setting is  
changed, the screen goes blank (due to  
incompatibility with your TV), you can  
switch back by pressing and holding the  
front panel (STOP) button then  
pressing OPEN/CLOSE (also front  
panel) while the recorder is stopped.  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area  
model:  
About NTSC on PAL TV  
Depending on the Input Line System setting  
and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal  
format output when the recorder is stopped  
varies as shown in the table below.  
Input Line  
System  
External  
input  
Built-in tuner  
625 System  
Auto  
PAL  
Auto  
Output  
when  
Input Line  
System  
NTSC on PAL  
TV  
PAL  
stopped  
SECAM  
n/a  
SECAM  
Auto  
625 System  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PAL  
525 System  
PAL  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
525 System  
NTSC  
PAL–60  
Other:  
Input Line  
System  
External  
input  
About the input color system  
The available options of the Input Color  
System setting depend on the Input Line  
System setting. The tables below show the  
different options available.  
Built-in tuner  
625 System  
Auto  
Auto  
PAL  
PAL  
SECAM  
3.58 NTSC  
SECAM  
Auto  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
525 System  
Input Line  
System  
External  
input  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
Built-in tuner  
625 System  
n/a  
Auto  
Additional information about  
PAL  
component video output  
SECAM  
Auto  
If you switch the Component Video Out  
setting to Progressive when using a TV that  
is not compatible with progressive-scan  
video, you will not be able to see anything  
displayed on your TV. If this happens, press  
and hold the (STOP) button on the front  
panel, then press (PLAY). This will set the  
recorder’s video output back to Interlace.  
525 System  
3.58 NTSC  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Selecting other languages  
for language options  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the  
language list.  
This option appears in the settings for DVD  
Menu Language, Audio Language, and  
Subtitle Language.  
ENTER  
2
Select the language you  
want.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD DVD Menu Language  
Tuner  
Audi
Language  
English  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Subt
0
1
4
Number  
Auto
5
Audio Out  
Language
Recording  
Playback  
DVD
Subt
• Select by language name: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to change the language.  
• Select by code number: Press then  
use the number buttons to enter the  
four-digit language code.  
See Language code list on page 130 for a list  
of available languages and corresponding  
codes.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Chapter 15  
Additional information  
Minimum copying times  
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.  
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc  
manufacturer for compatibility.  
DVD disc type  
DVD-R / 4x  
DVD-RW / 4x  
DVD+R / 4x  
DVD+RW / 4x  
DVD-R / 8x /16x  
DVD-RW / 6x  
DVD+R / 8x /16x  
DVD+RW / 8x  
DVD-RW / 2x  
DVD-R DL  
DVD-RAM / 2x  
DVD+R / 2.4x  
DVD+RW / 2.4x DVD-RAM / 5x  
DVD+R DL  
DVD-RAM / 3x  
Rec  
mode  
DVD-R / 1x  
DVD-RW / 1x  
1x  
2x  
2.4x  
*1  
3x  
4x  
6x  
SEP 10 h  
SLP 8 h  
EP 6 h  
LP 4 h  
SP 2 h  
XP 1 h  
6 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
10 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
60 mins.  
3 mins.  
4 mins.  
5 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
2 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
3.5 mins.  
5 mins.  
10 mins.  
20 mins.  
1.5 mins.*1 1.25 mins.*1  
2 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1  
2.5 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1  
*1  
*1  
6.3 mins.  
12.5 mins.  
25 mins.  
4 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
3 mins.  
5.5 mins.  
11 mins.  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc  
being recorded.  
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may  
be made at 2x speed).  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD  
types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.  
Video mode On (HDD)  
Video mode Off (HDD)  
Video mode (DVD),  
VR mode (DVD)  
DVD+R/+RW  
Resolution*1  
Resolution*1  
Level  
Rec. time  
Level  
Rec. time  
MN 1 *2,3  
MN 2 *2,3  
MN 3 *2,3  
MN 4 *3  
MN 5 *3  
MN 6 *3  
MN 7  
MN 8  
MN 9  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
352 x 240 /  
352 x 288  
352 x 240 /  
352 x 288  
EP  
LP  
352 x 480 / MN 7  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
300 mins. 352 x 480 /  
352 x 576  
352 x 576  
MN 8  
MN 9  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
480 x 480 /  
480 x 576  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
544 x 480 /  
544 x 576  
720 x 480 /  
720 x 576  
SP  
720 x 480 /  
720 x 576  
XP  
*1 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.  
*2 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.  
*3 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is  
in Linear PCM format.  
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space  
(equivalent to one recordable DVD).  
• See also Recording on page 31.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is  
something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the  
trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical  
appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The disc is automati-  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 8).  
cally ejected after clos- • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-  
ing the disc tray  
side up).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 132).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.  
Can’t play a disc  
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 8).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 132).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-  
side up).  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for  
an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.  
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a  
Line System different to the current recorder setting.  
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-  
once protected recordings will not play in this recorder.  
Can’t record a disc  
No picture  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 8).  
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been  
initialized (page 50). This can take up to 1 hour.  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to  
the correct input.  
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible  
TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel ꢇ  
(STOP) button then pressing (PLAY).  
All settings are reset  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the  
recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before  
unplugging the power cord.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
Remote control does  
not work  
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the  
CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to  
use (page 14).  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder  
(page 116). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is  
automatically reset to Recorder1.)  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 7).  
• Replace the batteries (page 6).  
No sound or sound is  
distorted  
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and  
the volume turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or  
slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.  
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS  
decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a  
suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out >  
DTS Out setting is On.  
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In  
this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.  
• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
Cannot switch a dual  
mono/bilingual pro-  
gram  
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels.  
The main and sub channels are both output.  
The picture from the  
external input is dis-  
torted  
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected,  
you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly  
to your TV.  
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 116). (You can also  
change it by pressing the (STOP) button and OPEN/CLOSE on  
the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)  
Screen is stretched ver- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 113) is correct for  
tically or horizontally  
the kind of TV you have (see also page 131).  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically  
according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not  
compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the  
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Problem  
Remedy  
Can’t play a disc  
recorded using this  
recorder on another  
player  
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized  
(page 48).  
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when  
recorded in Video mode and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be  
specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-  
CPRM compatible players (page 34).  
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded  
material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.  
During playback the  
picture is dark or dis-  
torted  
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not  
display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Can’t record or does  
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
not record successfully • For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already  
finalized.  
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:  
– HDD: 999 titles  
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc  
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title  
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254  
chapters per disc)  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 99).  
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC,  
etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc  
must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also  
necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want  
to record (page 116).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
Timer program doesn’t • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the  
record successfully  
recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once  
protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-  
once material (page 34).  
Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the  
earlier one will record completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
• Check that the recorder’s TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) settings are  
the same as the channel set for recording.  
After briefly unplug-  
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other  
ging or after a power settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After  
failure the front panel unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a  
display shows ‘--:--’  
period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings  
to use the recorder again.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
Front panel display  
shows ‘LOCK’ when a  
button is pressed  
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 44).  
Can’t use One Touch  
Copy (HDD to DVD)  
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some  
free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.  
Also make sure that for a Video mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t  
finalized.  
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some  
free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of  
remaining recordable titles may not decrease.  
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that  
there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once  
protected, One Touch Copy will not work.  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over 8 hours long when  
copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles  
when copying to DVD+R/+RW.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to  
DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch  
Copy (DVD to HDD)  
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there  
are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to  
the HDD.  
The picture freezes and • Press (STOP) then try restarting playback.  
the front panel and  
remote control but-  
tons stop working  
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power  
off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to  
switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON for 5 seconds until the  
power switches off.  
A device connected via • Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital  
USB does to function. camera, USB memory, memory card reader or printer).  
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.  
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.  
• Check that the USB device is powered on.  
• Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader  
connected is readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and  
connect the device you want to use first.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
HDMI  
Problem  
Remedy  
The connected HDMI or • Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the  
DVI device does not  
display any picture  
(and the front panel  
HDMI indicator does  
not light)  
power of both components is on).  
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.  
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next,  
switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds,  
then switch on this recorder.  
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the  
following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.  
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-  
standard cable may result in no picture being output.  
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single  
cable to connect devices together.  
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the  
following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.  
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.  
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x  
720p, 1920 x 1080i) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i)  
video input.  
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no  
HDMI output.  
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.  
No video from the  
HDMI output.  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not  
be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press (PLAY) while  
holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the  
setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the  
default setting).  
There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.  
the connected HDMI or • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with  
DVI device.  
the manual that came with the connected device).  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect  
the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
On-screen displays and recorder displays  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the  
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a  
moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,  
the recorder automatically initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region  
number for the recorder and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for DVD file  
management data.  
• No more space for HDD file  
management data.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or  
the maximum number of chapters and/or titles  
has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or  
combine chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo  
the finalization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD  
recorder. Undo the finalization in order to  
recording/editing.  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
• Could not record the information to  
the disc.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the  
disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a  
new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc,  
please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Cannot edit.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization  
successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization  
successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the  
disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This  
display may also appear if the disc is dirty or  
damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not  
CPRM compatible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR  
mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using  
Video mode recording.  
• This video cannot be recorded to  
DVD+R/+RW.  
• This content is copy protected.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be  
recorded.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM  
information. The recorder may be damaged—  
please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Repairing disc.  
• Repairing the HDD.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display  
appears when the power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a  
power cut. The contents of the recording will be  
lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation.  
Press DISPLAY to clear message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has  
exceeded the operating limit. If this message  
reappears, please contact a Pioneer authorized  
service center.  
• There is no DV input or the input  
signal is unrecordable.  
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may  
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in  
the connected camcorder.  
• HDD optimization is recommended.  
This can be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD  
housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording  
performance.  
• Please perform HDD optimization.  
This can be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in  
order to maintain performance.  
• The HDD has not been sufficiently  
optimized. Please optimize again.  
If this message appears repeatedly after  
optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not  
enough free space on the HDD for optimization to  
complete properly. Please erase some titles from  
the HDD and optimize again.  
• This signal’s TV system is different  
from the recorder’s setting.  
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current  
channel is different from the TV system settings of  
this recorder.  
• Recording failed due to a TV system  
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear  
message.  
The timer recording failed because the TV system  
of the channel set for recording was different from  
the setting of the recorder.  
• Playback has stopped because the TV During recording or timer recording standby, the  
system is different than the recording. TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video  
changed, causing playback to stop automatically.  
• No DV camcorder connected.  
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the  
camcorder is switched off.  
You cannot connect more than one  
DV camcorder at a time.  
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to  
just one camcorder.  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back  
on again.  
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV  
camcorder.  
• The DV camcorder is not set for  
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to  
playback. Please select playback mode playback mode.  
on the DV camcorder.  
• Searching for a printer. Please wait a This message is displayed when the recorder is  
moment. To cancel, press ENTER.  
scanning for a connected printer, or when the  
printer is not yet ready for printing. If there is no  
printer connected, please connect one.  
If the message does not disappear, try  
disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.  
(Note that this recorder may not work correctly  
with all printers.)  
• The printer is not ready or is not  
connected. Please check the printer.  
This message is displayed when communication  
could not be established with the printer. See the  
Troubleshooting section if you do not know the  
cause.  
• Printing has been canceled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer  
error during printing. After checking the printer for  
the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer  
and start the printing job again, or select "Yes" to  
resume printing (select "No" to cancel the print  
job). See also the operating instructions that came  
with your printer for possible causes of print  
errors.  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Setting up the remote to  
control your TV  
Maker  
Alba  
Code  
66  
Bush  
76  
You can use the supplied remote to control  
your TV. To be able to use this feature you  
first have to program the remote with a  
maker code from the table below.  
Finlux  
84  
Fisher  
61, 65  
77  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR  
button, then enter the maker code for  
67  
your TV.  
Goldstar  
Grandiente  
Grundig  
Hitachi  
ITT  
79  
The LED indicator on the remote controls  
lights.  
87  
See the table below for the list of maker  
codes. If there is more than one code given  
for your make, input the first one in the list.  
51, 82  
56, 60, 83, 86  
70  
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t  
appear in the table below, you will not be  
able to use this remote to control your  
TV.  
Mitsubishi  
Nokia  
59  
53, 81  
58, 72  
57, 85  
50, 80  
68  
2
Press TV to check that the remote  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
RCA  
works with your TV.  
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV  
should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is  
another code given for your maker, repeat  
step 1 with a new code.  
Using the TV remote control  
buttons  
The table below shows how to use this  
remote control with your TV.  
Salora  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
71  
73, 75  
74  
Button  
What it does  
Sei  
78  
TV  
Press to switch the TV on/off  
(standby)  
Sharp  
52  
Sony  
54  
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s  
Tandy  
69  
video input  
Telefunken  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
JVC  
64  
TV VOLUME  
Use to adjust the TV volume  
62  
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels  
55  
63  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Tatar (tt), 2020  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm),  
1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Country/Area code list  
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Korea, Republic of, 1118,  
kr  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702,  
gb  
China, 0314, cn  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Russian Federation, 1821, ru USA, 2119, us  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is shown in widescreen with  
black bars at the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
The sides of the program are cropped so that  
the picture fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is presented correctly on either  
setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
16:9  
The program is presented in widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the picture is  
presented—check the manual that came  
with the TV for details.  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Handling discs  
For more detailed care information see the  
instructions that come with discs.  
Do not load more than one disc into the  
recorder.  
When holding discs of any type, take care  
not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on  
the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or  
by the center hole and edge.  
Damaged discs  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.  
If you can see that a disc is cracked,  
chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged,  
don't risk using it; you could end up  
damaging the recorder.  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback  
and recording performance. Take care also  
not to scratch the label side of the disc.  
Although not as fragile as the recorded side,  
scratches can still result in a disc becoming  
unusable.  
This recorder is designed for use with  
conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of  
shaped discs is not recommended for this  
product. Pioneer disclaims all liability  
arising in connection with the use of shaped  
discs.  
Should a disc become marked with  
fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft,  
dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the  
center to the outside edge. Do not clean  
discs with a circular motion.  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol,  
or a commercially available CD/DVD  
cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.  
Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning  
agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become  
dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it  
should malfunction due to dust or dirt,  
consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized  
service center. Although lens cleaners for  
CD player are commercially available, we do  
not recommend using them since some may  
damage the lens.  
Storing discs  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more  
durable than vinyl records, you should still  
take care to handle and store discs correctly.  
When you're not using a disc, return it to its  
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs  
in excessively cold, humid, or hot  
environments (including under direct  
sunlight).  
Condensation  
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the  
disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other  
sharp-tipped writing instrument. These  
could all damage the disc.  
Condensation may form inside the recorder  
if it is brought into a warm room from  
outside, or if the temperature of the room  
rises quickly. Although the condensation  
won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this  
reason you should leave it to adjust to the  
warmer temperature for about an hour  
before switching on and using.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Hints on installation  
15  
Moving the recorder  
We want you to enjoy using this unit for  
years to come, so please bear in mind the  
following points when choosing a suitable  
location for it:  
If you need to move the recorder, first  
remove the disc, if there’s one loaded, and  
close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/  
ON to switch the power to standby, checking  
that the POWER OFF indication in the  
display goes off. Wait at least two minutes.  
Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift  
or move the unit during playback or  
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and  
may be damaged.  
Do...  
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such  
as a table, shelf or stereo rack.  
Don’t...  
Resetting the recorder  
Use in a place exposed to high  
temperatures or humidity, including near  
radiators and other heat-generating  
appliances.  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to  
all its factory settings.  
Place on a window sill or other place  
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
where the recorder will be exposed to direct  
sunlight.  
2
Press and hold (STOP) and press ꢅ  
STANDBY/ON.  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or  
in a room where it will be exposed to  
excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or  
other component in your stereo system that  
becomes hot in use.  
Use near a television or monitor as you  
may experience interference—especially if  
the television uses an indoor antenna.  
Use in a kitchen or other room where the  
recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover  
with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling  
of the unit.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that  
is not large enough to support all four of the  
unit’s feet.  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Additional information  
Recording time  
HDD  
DVR-745H-S (400 GB)  
Specifications  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 85 h  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 510 h  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 680 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 850 h  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 85 h to 1137 h  
DVR-645H-S (250 GB)  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 53 h to 711 h  
General  
Power requirements  
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 W  
Power consumption in standby mode  
(Front panel display: off)  
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.47 W  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.32 W  
Weight  
DVR-745H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 kg  
DVR-645H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 kg  
Dimensions  
. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 69 mm (H) x 318 mm (D)  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM  
Operating temperature  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h  
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h  
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C  
Operating humidity  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)  
TV system  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC  
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC  
Readable discs  
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,  
DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW  
(WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)  
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m  
(DVD-R DL only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h  
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m  
Recording discs and formats  
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode  
DVD-RAM: VR mode  
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R DL: +VR mode  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG  
Timer  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs  
Clock  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz  
Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
Taiwan and Philippines model. . . . . . . . . . . . Quartzlock  
(12-hour digital display1)  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock  
(24-hour digital display)  
Note  
134  
En  
1 If the country is set to Philippines the clock switches to 24 hour display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Tuner  
Input/Output  
Receivable channels  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal  
Taiwan and Philippines model. . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75  
(F-shape connector)  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
VHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ch to 13 ch  
UHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ch to 69 ch  
CATV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 ch to C125 ch  
Other . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 (IEC connector)  
Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack  
Video Output 1, 2  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack  
S-Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear)  
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) - Input level  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 )  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN  
S-Video Output 1, 2  
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) - Output level  
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model  
:
SECAM B/G  
PAL I  
PAL B/G  
Frequency  
Channel  
E2 to E4  
X to Z  
Frequency  
Channel  
A to C  
X to Z  
D to J  
11, 13  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
47 MHz to 89 MHz  
44 MHz to 89 MHz  
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12 104 MHz to 300 MHz  
S1 to S20  
M1 to M10  
U1 to U10  
S1 to S20  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
SECAM D/K  
PAL D/K  
Frequency  
Channel  
R1 – R5  
VHF (low)  
49 MHz to 94 MHz  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 )  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN  
Component video output  
VHF (high) 104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 – R12  
S1 – S20  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 – S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 – E69  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 )  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Audio Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) L/R  
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Audio Output 1, 2 L/R  
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Other connections  
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack  
Digital audio ouptut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial  
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 pin (front)  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
Other:  
SECAM B/G  
PAL B/G  
PAL I  
Frequency  
44 MHz to 89 MHz  
Frequency  
Channel  
E2 to E4  
X to Z  
Channel  
A to C  
X to Z  
D to J  
11, 13  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
47 MHz to 89 MHz  
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12 104 MHz to 300 MHz  
S1 to S20  
M1 to M10  
U1 to U10  
S1 to S20  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
SECAM D/K  
PAL D/K  
Frequency  
Channel  
VHF (low)  
49 MHz to 94 MHz  
R1 – R5  
VHF (high) 104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 – R12  
S1 – S20  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 – S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 – E69  
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Type A (front), Type B (front)  
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin  
Hyper  
UHF  
STEREO  
B/G - A2  
I - NICAM  
B/G - NICAM  
D/K - NICAM  
M/N - BTSC  
NTSC-M/N  
Supplied accessories  
Frequency  
Channel  
2 to 13  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
55 MHz to 218 MHz  
471 MHz to 808 MHz  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Operating Instructions  
14 to 69  
72 MHz to 806 MHz C1 to C125  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are  
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced  
by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered  
trademark of NEC Corporation.  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_A_En  
Printed in China  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<VRB1453-A>  

Philips Headphones SHS420 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player MCD139 User Manual
Philips TV VCR Combo 14PV350 07 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo Receiver SC 1524 K User Manual
Polar Fitness Electronics FA20 User Manual
Polaris Offroad Vehicle Trail Boss 330 Quadricycle User Manual
Poulan Chainsaw 530086680 User Manual
Precision Power Speaker S12 User Manual
ProForm Home Gym 831237450 User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Amplifier PLMRA400 User Manual